WO2024092513A1 - Control method, communication device, and storage medium - Google Patents

Control method, communication device, and storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024092513A1
WO2024092513A1 PCT/CN2022/129006 CN2022129006W WO2024092513A1 WO 2024092513 A1 WO2024092513 A1 WO 2024092513A1 CN 2022129006 W CN2022129006 W CN 2022129006W WO 2024092513 A1 WO2024092513 A1 WO 2024092513A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
random access
group
parameter
physical
ssb
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/129006
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
朱荣昌
黄伟
黄钧蔚
Original Assignee
深圳传音控股股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 filed Critical 深圳传音控股股份有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2022/129006 priority Critical patent/WO2024092513A1/en
Publication of WO2024092513A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024092513A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00Synchronisation arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access
    • H04W74/08Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a control method, communication equipment and storage medium.
  • SSB Synchronization Signal and PBCH block
  • SSB Synchronization Signal and PBCH block
  • the main purpose of the present application is to provide a control method, a communication device and a storage medium, aiming to improve the accuracy of timing adjustment.
  • the present application provides a control method, which can be applied to a terminal device (such as a mobile phone), comprising the following steps:
  • S1 Adjust uplink timing based on downlink information.
  • the present application also provides a control method, which can be applied to a network device (such as a base station), comprising the following steps:
  • S0 Send downlink information so that the terminal device can adjust the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
  • the present application also provides a communication device, comprising: a memory, a processor, and a control program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, wherein the control program implements the steps of any of the control methods described above when executed by the processor.
  • the present application also provides a storage medium, on which a computer program is stored.
  • a computer program is stored.
  • the steps of any of the control methods described above are implemented.
  • the present application adjusts the uplink timing based on the downlink information, so that in multiple network device scenarios, the random access process can be performed based on a specific network device, thereby improving the accuracy of the timing adjustment.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal for implementing various embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG2 is a diagram of a communication network system architecture provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a controller 140 provided in the present application.
  • FIG4 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a network node 150 provided in the present application.
  • FIG5 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to the first embodiment
  • FIG6 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a second embodiment
  • FIG7 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a third embodiment
  • FIG8 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a fourth embodiment
  • FIG9 is a first principle schematic diagram of a control method according to a fifth embodiment.
  • FIG10 is a second principle schematic diagram of a control method according to the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG11 is a third principle schematic diagram of a control method according to the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG12 is a first principle schematic diagram of a control method according to a sixth embodiment.
  • FIG13 is a second principle schematic diagram of a control method according to a sixth embodiment.
  • FIG14 is a first principle schematic diagram of a control method according to an eighth embodiment.
  • FIG15 is a second principle schematic diagram of a control method according to the eighth embodiment.
  • FIG16 is a first structural diagram of a control device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG17 is a second structural schematic diagram of a control device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG18 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • first, second, third, etc. may be used to describe various information in this article, these information should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish the same type of information from each other.
  • first information may also be referred to as the second information
  • second information may also be referred to as the first information.
  • word “if” as used herein can be interpreted as “at the time of -- or "when" or "in response to determination”.
  • singular forms “one”, “one” and “the” are intended to also include plural forms, unless there is an opposite indication in the context.
  • “comprising at least one of the following: A, B, C” means “any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C”, and for another example, “A, B or C” or “A, B and/or C” means “any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C”.
  • An exception to this definition will only occur when a combination of elements, functions, steps or operations are inherently mutually exclusive in some manner.
  • the words “if” and “if” may be interpreted as “at the time of” or “when” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting”, depending on the context.
  • the phrases “if it is determined” or “if (stated condition or event) is detected” may be interpreted as “when it is determined” or “in response to determining” or “when detecting (stated condition or event)” or “in response to detecting (stated condition or event)", depending on the context.
  • step codes such as S1 and S2 are used for the purpose of expressing the corresponding content more clearly and concisely, and do not constitute a substantial limitation on the order.
  • S2 first and then S1, etc., but these should all be within the scope of protection of this application.
  • module means, “component” or “unit” used to represent elements are only used to facilitate the description of the present application, and have no specific meanings. Therefore, “module”, “component” or “unit” can be used in a mixed manner.
  • the terminal device may be implemented in various forms.
  • the terminal device described in this application may include intelligent terminal devices such as mobile phones, tablet computers, laptop computers, PDAs, portable media players (PMPs), navigation devices, wearable devices, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc., as well as fixed terminal devices such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
  • intelligent terminal devices such as mobile phones, tablet computers, laptop computers, PDAs, portable media players (PMPs), navigation devices, wearable devices, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc.
  • PDAs portable media players
  • navigation devices wearable devices
  • smart bracelets smart bracelets
  • pedometers etc.
  • fixed terminal devices such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal for implementing various embodiments of the present application.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may include: an RF (Radio Frequency) unit 101, a WiFi module 102, an audio output unit 103, an A/V (audio/video) input unit 104, a sensor 105, a display unit 106, a user input unit 107, an interface unit 108, a memory 109, a processor 110, and a power supply 111.
  • RF Radio Frequency
  • the radio frequency unit 101 can be used for receiving and sending signals during information transmission or calls. Specifically, after receiving the downlink information of the base station, it is sent to the processor 110 for processing; in addition, the uplink data is sent to the base station.
  • the radio frequency unit 101 includes but is not limited to an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, etc.
  • the radio frequency unit 101 can also communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication.
  • the above-mentioned wireless communications may use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access 2000), WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), FDD-LTE (Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution), TDD-LTE (Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution), 5G and 6G, etc.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • CDMA2000 Code Division Multiple Access 2000
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • TD-SCDMA Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access
  • FDD-LTE Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution
  • TDD-LTE Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution
  • 5G and 6G etc.
  • WiFi is a short-range wireless transmission technology.
  • the mobile terminal can help users send and receive emails, browse web pages, and access streaming media through the WiFi module 102, which provides users with wireless broadband Internet access.
  • FIG1 shows the WiFi module 102, it is understandable that it is not a necessary component of the mobile terminal and can be omitted as needed without changing the essence of the invention.
  • the audio output unit 103 can convert the audio data received by the RF unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 or stored in the memory 109 into an audio signal and output it as sound when the mobile terminal 100 is in a call signal reception mode, a talk mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, a broadcast reception mode, etc. Moreover, the audio output unit 103 can also provide audio output related to a specific function performed by the mobile terminal 100 (for example, a call signal reception sound, a message reception sound, etc.). The audio output unit 103 may include a speaker, a buzzer, etc.
  • the A/V input unit 104 is used to receive audio or video signals.
  • the A/V input unit 104 may include a graphics processor (GPU) 1041 and a microphone 1042, and the graphics processor 1041 processes the image data of a static picture or video obtained by an image capture device (such as a camera) in a video capture mode or an image capture mode.
  • the processed image frame can be displayed on the display unit 106.
  • the image frame processed by the graphics processor 1041 can be stored in the memory 109 (or other storage medium) or sent via the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102.
  • the microphone 1042 can receive sound (audio data) via the microphone 1042 in the operation modes such as the telephone call mode, the recording mode, the voice recognition mode, etc., and can process such sound into audio data.
  • the processed audio (voice) data can be converted into a format output that can be sent to a mobile communication base station via the radio frequency unit 101 in the case of the telephone call mode.
  • the microphone 1042 can implement various types of noise elimination (or suppression) algorithms to eliminate (or suppress) noise or interference generated in the process of receiving and sending audio signals.
  • the mobile terminal 100 also includes at least one sensor 105, such as a light sensor, a motion sensor, and other sensors.
  • the light sensor includes an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor.
  • the ambient light sensor can adjust the brightness of the display panel 1061 according to the brightness of the ambient light
  • the proximity sensor can turn off the display panel 1061 and/or the backlight when the mobile terminal 100 is moved to the ear.
  • the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in all directions (generally three axes), and can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity when stationary.
  • sensors such as fingerprint sensors, pressure sensors, iris sensors, molecular sensors, gyroscopes, barometers, hygrometers, thermometers, infrared sensors, etc.
  • the display unit 106 is used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user.
  • the display unit 106 may include a display panel 1061, which may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), or the like.
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • the user input unit 107 can be used to receive input digital or character information, and to generate key signal input related to the user settings and function control of the mobile terminal.
  • the user input unit 107 may include a touch panel 1071 and other input devices 1072.
  • the touch panel 1071 also known as a touch screen, can collect the user's touch operation on or near it (such as the user's operation on the touch panel 1071 or near the touch panel 1071 using any suitable object or accessory such as a finger, stylus, etc.), and drive the corresponding connection device according to a pre-set program.
  • the touch panel 1071 may include two parts: a touch detection device and a touch controller.
  • the touch detection device detects the user's touch orientation, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device, converts it into the touch point coordinates, and then sends it to the processor 110, and can receive and execute the command sent by the processor 110.
  • the touch panel 1071 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave.
  • the user input unit 107 may further include other input devices 1072.
  • the other input devices 1072 may include, but are not limited to, one or more of a physical keyboard, a function key (such as a volume control key, a switch key, etc.), a trackball, a mouse, a joystick, etc., which are not specifically limited here.
  • a function key such as a volume control key, a switch key, etc.
  • a trackball such as a mouse, a joystick, etc.
  • the touch panel 1071 may cover the display panel 1061.
  • the touch panel 1071 detects a touch operation on or near it, it is transmitted to the processor 110 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 110 provides a corresponding visual output on the display panel 1061 according to the type of the touch event.
  • the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 are used as two independent components to implement the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, in some embodiments, the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 can be integrated to implement the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, which is not limited here.
  • the interface unit 108 serves as an interface through which at least one external device can be connected to the mobile terminal 100.
  • the external device may include a wired or wireless headset port, an external power supply (or battery charger) port, a wired or wireless data port, a memory card port, a port for connecting a device with an identification module, an audio input/output (I/O) port, a video I/O port, a headphone port, etc.
  • the interface unit 108 may be used to receive input (e.g., data information, power, etc.) from an external device and transmit the received input to one or more elements within the mobile terminal 100 or may be used to transmit data between the mobile terminal 100 and an external device.
  • the memory 109 can be used to store software programs and various data.
  • the memory 109 can mainly include a program storage area and a data storage area.
  • the program storage area can store an operating system, an application required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), etc.;
  • the data storage area can store data created according to the use of the mobile phone (such as audio data, a phone book, etc.), etc.
  • the memory 109 can include a high-speed random access memory, and can also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, a flash memory device, or other volatile solid-state storage devices.
  • the processor 110 is the control center of the mobile terminal. It uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile terminal. It executes various functions of the mobile terminal and processes data by running or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 109, and calling data stored in the memory 109, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 110 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor.
  • the application processor mainly processes the operating system, user interface, and application programs
  • the modem processor mainly processes wireless communications. It is understandable that the above-mentioned modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 110.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may also include a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components.
  • a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components.
  • the power supply 111 may be logically connected to the processor 110 via a power management system, thereby implementing functions such as managing charging, discharging, and power consumption management through the power management system.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may further include a Bluetooth module, etc., which will not be described in detail herein.
  • the communication network system is a NR (New Radio) system of universal mobile communication technology.
  • the NR system includes UE (User Equipment) 201, E-UTRAN (Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network) 202, EPC (Evolved Packet Core) 203 and the operator's IP service 204, which are connected in sequence.
  • UE User Equipment
  • E-UTRAN Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core
  • UE201 may be the above-mentioned terminal device 100, which will not be described in detail here.
  • E-UTRAN 202 includes eNodeB 2021 and other eNodeBs 2022 , etc.
  • eNodeB 2021 may be connected to other eNodeBs 2022 via a backhaul (eg, an X2 interface), and eNodeB 2021 is connected to EPC 203 , and eNodeB 2021 may provide UE 201 with access to EPC 203 .
  • a backhaul eg, an X2 interface
  • EPC203 may include MME (Mobility Management Entity) 2031, HSS (Home Subscriber Server) 2032, other MMEs 2033, SGW (Serving Gate Way) 2034, PGW (PDN Gate Way) 2035 and PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function) 2036.
  • MME 2031 is a control node that processes signaling between UE 201 and EPC 203, providing bearer and connection management.
  • HSS 2032 is used to provide some registers to manage functions such as home location register (not shown in the figure), and save some user-specific information such as service features and data rates. All user data can be sent through SGW2034.
  • PGW2035 can provide IP address allocation and other functions for UE 201.
  • PCRF2036 is the policy and charging control policy decision point for service data flow and IP bearer resources. It selects and provides available policy and charging control decisions for the policy and charging execution functional unit (not shown in the figure).
  • IP service 204 may include the Internet, intranet, IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) or other IP services.
  • IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a controller 140 provided in the present application.
  • the controller 140 includes: a memory 1401 and a processor 1402, the memory 1401 is used to store program instructions, and the processor 1402 is used to call the program instructions in the memory 1401 to execute the steps performed by the controller in the first embodiment of the above method, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
  • the controller further includes a communication interface 1403, which can be connected to the processor 1402 via a bus 1404.
  • the processor 1402 can control the communication interface 1403 to implement the receiving and sending functions of the controller 140.
  • Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a network node 150 provided by the present application.
  • the network node 150 includes: a memory 1501 and a processor 1502, the memory 1501 is used to store program instructions, and the processor 1502 is used to call the program instructions in the memory 1501 to execute the steps performed by the first node in the first embodiment of the above method, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
  • the controller further includes a communication interface 1503, which can be connected to the processor 1502 via a bus 1504.
  • the processor 1502 can control the communication interface 1503 to implement the receiving and sending functions of the network node 150.
  • the above-mentioned integrated module implemented in the form of a software function module can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the above-mentioned software function module is stored in a storage medium, including a number of instructions for enabling a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor (English: processor) to perform some steps of the methods of various embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions can be stored in a storage medium, or transmitted from one storage medium to another storage medium.
  • the computer instructions can be transmitted from one website site, computer, server or data center to another website site, computer, server or data center by wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by the computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that includes one or more available media integrated.
  • the available medium can be a magnetic medium (e.g., a floppy disk, a hard disk, a tape), an optical medium (e.g., a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (e.g., a solid state drive solid state disk, SSD), etc.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a first embodiment.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present application can be applied to a terminal device (such as a mobile phone).
  • the control method includes the following steps:
  • S1 Adjust uplink timing based on downlink information.
  • the multiple network device scenarios are multiple network device scenarios based on multiple downlink control information (DCI, Downlink Control Information), for example: a scenario with multiple transmission receiving points based on multiple downlink control information.
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • the control resource set pool index value parameter for example: coresetPoolIndex
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • IE Information Element
  • control resource set pool index value parameter When the control resource set pool index value parameter is 0 and 1, it corresponds to two groups of control resource sets (CORESET, Control Resource Set), for example: a first group of control resource sets, wherein the control resource set pool index value parameter of each control resource set is 0; a second group of control resource sets, wherein the control resource set pool index value parameter of each control resource set is 1.
  • a terminal device can receive/monitor two physical downlink control channels (PDCCH, Physical Downlink Control Channel) on resources corresponding to two groups of control resource sets.
  • the network device includes a first network device and a second network device, and the first network device is associated with a control resource set pool index value parameter value 0.
  • the terminal device receives/monitors a first physical downlink control channel sent from the first network device on resources corresponding to the first group of control resource sets with a control resource set pool index value parameter of 0, and receives a physical downlink shared information scheduled by the first physical downlink control channel from the first network device.
  • the terminal device receives/monitors a second physical downlink control channel sent from the second network device on resources corresponding to a second group of control resource sets whose index value parameter is 1, receives a physical downlink shared channel or a downlink reference signal scheduled by the second physical downlink control channel from the second network device, and/or sends a physical uplink shared channel or a physical uplink control channel or an uplink reference signal scheduled by the second physical downlink control channel to the first network device; the second network device is associated with the control resource pool index value parameter 1, and optionally, the terminal device receives/monitors a second physical downlink control channel sent from the second network device on resources corresponding to a second group of control resource sets whose index value parameter is 1, receives a physical downlink shared channel or a downlink reference signal scheduled by the second physical downlink control channel from the second network device, and/or sends a physical uplink shared channel or a physical uplink control channel or an uplink reference signal scheduled by the second physical downlink control channel to the second network device.
  • the first network device and the second network device may belong to the same cell or to different cells.
  • the downlink information includes at least one of radio resource control signaling, system information, downlink control information and a synchronization broadcast block;
  • the radio resource control signaling and/or the system information includes at least one of a synchronization broadcast block position parameter in a burst, a synchronization broadcast block number parameter for each element, an element arrangement pattern parameter, a group parameter, a group status parameter, a short bitmap parameter, a medium bitmap parameter, and a long bitmap parameter, and optionally, the system information is a system information block 1 (SIB1, System Information Block 1);
  • SIB1 System Information Block 1
  • the downlink control information includes first downlink control information and/or second downlink control information.
  • the terminal device may be in a single network device or multiple network device scenario, and the terminal device may implicitly or explicitly determine when to group the synchronization broadcast block (SSB, Synchronization Signal and PBCH block), that is, to associate different SSBs with different network devices.
  • All candidate SSBs are grouped according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divided into two groups of candidate SSBs, each group of candidate SSBs is associated with one network device.
  • the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst (for example: ssb-PositionsInBurst, also known as the synchronous broadcast block position parameter in the burst) in the service cell common configuration information element and/or the service cell common system information block configuration information element are grouped and divided into two groups of SSBs for transmission, each group being sent from one network device.
  • the SSB position parameter in the burst for example: ssb-PositionsInBurst, also known as the synchronous broadcast block position parameter in the burst
  • the terminal device can directly obtain the SSB for transmission of the first and second network devices through two parameters (for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2) or two groups of parameters (for example, two groups of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two groups of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap and longBitmap).
  • two parameters for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2
  • two groups of parameters for example, two groups of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two groups of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap and longBitmap.
  • the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the first network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for a subsequent random access channel (RACH) process; and/or, the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the second network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for a subsequent RACH process.
  • RACH random access channel
  • a random access response corresponding to the random access preamble is received in a random access response window, and then timing adjustment is performed on a physical uplink channel and/or a reference signal according to a timing advance command in the random access response.
  • This embodiment uses the above solution, specifically by adjusting the uplink timing based on the downlink information, so that in a scenario of multiple network devices, the random access process can be performed based on a specific network device, thereby improving the accuracy of the timing adjustment.
  • FIG. 6 is a flow chart of a control method according to the second embodiment, showing that the specific steps of S1 include:
  • S11 Selecting or determining a physical random access channel timing based on downlink information
  • the SSBs are divided into two groups according to the radio resource control signaling and/or system information in the downlink information, the first group of SSBs are sent from the first network device, and the second group of SSBs are sent from the second network device.
  • the best SSB is selected from the first group of SSBs, and a random access preamble (e.g., Preamble) is sent to the first network device based on the SSB; and/or, the best SSB is selected from the second group of SSBs, and a random access preamble is sent to the second network device based on the SSB.
  • a random access preamble e.g., Preamble
  • S12 Send a random access preamble on a physical random access channel
  • the terminal device determines a first physical random access channel occasion (PRACH occasion) according to the first SSB, and/or determines a second PRACH occasion according to the second SSB.
  • PRACH occasion physical random access channel occasion
  • the terminal device determines a first physical random access channel occasion (PRACH occasion) according to the first SSB, and/or determines a second PRACH occasion according to the second SSB.
  • the terminal device can directly send a random access preamble to the first network device in the first PRACH occasion, and the terminal device can directly send a random access preamble to the second network device in the second PRACH occasion.
  • the terminal device sends random access preambles to two network devices at different PRACH occasions in the time domain through the following methods:
  • the second random access process is not performed before the first random access response window expires: the terminal device first sends a random access preamble to one of the network devices, and the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the other network device after the random access response window expires.
  • Send a random access preamble in the subsequent available PRACH occasion corresponding to the SSB If the first PRACH occasion and the second PRACH occasion are the same in the time domain, the terminal device first sends a random access preamble to one network device, and obtains the subsequent available PRACH occasion associated with the other network device according to the best SSB corresponding to the other network device. The terminal device selects a PRACH occasion from them to send a random access preamble to the network device.
  • a constraint relationship is designed for the association method between SSB and PRACH occasion: a first physical random access channel opportunity is obtained based on the constraint relationship and the first synchronous broadcast block, and/or a second physical random access channel opportunity is obtained based on the constraint relationship and the second synchronous broadcast block.
  • S13 receiving a random access response, and adjusting the timing of a physical uplink channel and/or a reference signal according to the timing advance command, specifically including at least one of the following:
  • the timing of the second physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal is adjusted according to the second timing advance command.
  • a timing adjustment is performed on the physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal according to the timing advance command.
  • the uplink timing adjustment includes an uplink timing adjustment based on non-competition random access and/or an uplink timing adjustment based on competition random access.
  • the physical uplink channel includes a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH, Physical Uplink Shared Channel) and/or a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH, Physical Uplink Control Channel), and the reference signal includes a channel sounding reference signal (SRS, Sounding Reference Signal).
  • PUSCH Physical Uplink shared channel
  • PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • the uplink timing adjustment based on non-contention random access mainly includes the following steps:
  • the first step sending downlink control information from a first network device, optionally including a first random access preamble index value, a first SSB index value and a first physical random access channel (PRACH, Physical Random Access Channel) mask index value, optionally, the first random access preamble index value is not all zero; and/or, sending downlink control information from a second network device, optionally including a second random access preamble index value, a second SSB index value and a second physical random access channel mask index value, optionally, the second random access preamble index value is not all zero.
  • a first network device optionally including a first random access preamble index value, a first SSB index value and a first physical random access channel (PRACH, Physical Random Access Channel) mask index value, optionally, the first random access preamble index value is not all zero
  • PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
  • Step 2 The terminal device determines the first PRACH occasion according to the first SSB index value and the first physical random access channel mask index value, and sends the first random access preamble to the first network device at the first PRACH occasion; and/or, the terminal device determines the second PRACH occasion according to the second SSB index value and the second physical random access channel mask index value, and sends the second random access preamble to the second network device at the second PRACH occasion.
  • Step 3 Send a random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble from the first network device, and/or send a random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble from the second network device.
  • Step 4 Use the first timing advance command to perform timing adjustment on the first physical uplink channel/reference signal, and/or use the second timing advance command to perform timing adjustment on the second physical uplink channel/reference signal.
  • the uplink timing adjustment of the contention-based random access mainly includes the following steps:
  • Step 1 Contention-based random access includes contention-based random access initiated by a terminal device and contention-based random access initiated by a network device.
  • the contention-based random access initiated by a terminal device includes type 1 random access and type 2 random access.
  • Contention-based random access initiated by a network device is to instruct a terminal device to perform random access by sending downlink control information, that is: downlink control information is sent from a first network device, optionally including a first random access preamble index value, optionally, the first random access preamble index value is all 0; and/or downlink control information is sent from a second network device, optionally including a second random access preamble index value, optionally, the second random access preamble index value is all 0.
  • the terminal device selects a first SSB from the first group of SSBs and/or selects a second SSB from the second group of SSBs.
  • Step 2 The terminal device determines the first PRACH occasion based on the first SSB, and/or determines the second PRACH occasion based on the second SSB.
  • Step 3 The terminal device sends a first random access preamble to the first network device at the first PRACH occasion, and/or sends a second random access preamble to the second network device at the second PRACH occasion.
  • Step 4 Send a random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble from the first network device, and/or send a random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble from the second network device.
  • an absolute timing advance command media access control layer control element e.g., absolute timing advance command MAC CE
  • MAC CE media access control layer control element
  • Step 5 Use the first timing advance command to perform timing adjustment on the first physical uplink channel/reference signal, and/or use the second timing advance command to perform timing adjustment on the second physical uplink channel/reference signal.
  • This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by selecting or determining the physical random access channel opportunity based on downlink information; sending a random access preamble at the physical random access channel opportunity; receiving a random access response, and adjusting the timing of the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal according to the timing advance command.
  • SSB is configured based on a specific network device to improve the accuracy of timing adjustment.
  • FIG. 7 is a flow chart of a control method according to a third embodiment, showing that the specific steps of step S11 include:
  • S111 Select or determine a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on radio resource control signaling and/or system information;
  • At least one of the following is further included:
  • a second group of in-group parameters and group status parameters, and/or at least one of a second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters are added to the synchronous broadcast block position parameters in the burst.
  • the terminal device may be in a single network device or multiple network device scenario.
  • the terminal device needs to determine when to group the synchronous broadcast blocks, that is, to associate different SSBs with different network devices, which can be done in the following ways:
  • Implicit method The terminal device judges according to the application scenario.
  • the current scenario is based on multiple network devices with multiple DCIs. That is, the control resource set pool index value parameter configured by RRC in the control resource set information element has two values, 0 and 1.
  • the terminal device can consider that SSB needs to be grouped.
  • Explicit method Indicate that SSB needs to be grouped through parameters in the serving cell common configuration information element (e.g., ServingCellConfigCommon) and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element (e.g., ServingCellConfigCommonSIB).
  • ServingCellConfigCommon the serving cell common configuration information element
  • ServingCellConfigCommonSIB the serving cell common system information block configuration information element
  • the configuration of this parameter means that the SSB needs to be grouped.
  • the newly added parameter is a synchronous broadcast block position parameter in the second burst, and/or a group parameter and a group status parameter of the second group, and/or at least one of a short bitmap parameter, a medium bitmap parameter and a long bitmap parameter of the second group.
  • each element in the first group of SSBs contains X SSBs
  • each element in the second group of SSBs contains Y SSBs
  • the first group of SSBs is associated with a first network device
  • the second group of SSBs is associated with a second network device
  • all elements in the first group of SSBs and the second group of SSBs are arranged in a pattern
  • X and Y are integers, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.
  • the values of X and Y may be the same or different. The following methods are used to determine the values of X and Y:
  • Default mode X and Y values use default values
  • Network equipment configuration Two new parameters are added in the serving cell common configuration information element and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element to indicate the values of X and Y. In particular, if the values of X and Y are the same, only one parameter is needed to indicate the values of X and Y.
  • the pattern may be a cyclic pattern or a half-and-half pattern.
  • the default is to use a half-and-half pattern
  • New parameters are added to the serving cell common configuration information element and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element to indicate the pattern in which all elements are currently arranged, for example: a circular arrangement pattern or a half-and-half arrangement pattern.
  • the step of selecting or determining the first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on radio resource control signaling and/or system information includes at least one of the following:
  • a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks is obtained according to at least one of the first group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters
  • a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks is obtained according to at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters.
  • Synchronization Signal and PBCH block can be divided into two groups as follows:
  • Grouping candidate SSBs All candidate SSBs are grouped according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements into two groups of candidate SSBs. Then, two groups of SSBs for transmission are obtained by combining the SSB position parameters in the burst.
  • the terminal device groups the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst according to the number of SSBs in each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divides them into two groups of SSBs for transmission.
  • Two sets of SSBs for transmission can be directly obtained through two parameters (for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2) or two sets of parameters (for example, two sets of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two sets of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap, and longBitmap).
  • two parameters for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2
  • two sets of parameters for example, two sets of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two sets of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap, and longBitmap.
  • S112 Select or determine a first physical random access channel timing based on the first synchronization broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or select or determine a second physical random access channel timing based on the second synchronization broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information.
  • the step of selecting or determining the first physical random access channel opportunity and/or the second physical random access channel opportunity includes at least one of the following:
  • the first preset condition is met, obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or selecting one from the subsequently available physical random access channel opportunities corresponding to the second synchronization broadcast block as a second physical random access channel opportunity;
  • the second preset condition is met, obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtaining a second physical random access channel opportunity according to the second synchronization broadcast block;
  • the network device identifier is added to the random access wireless network temporary identifier calculation formula to obtain an improved random access wireless network temporary identifier, and the first physical random access channel timing is obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or the second physical random access channel timing is obtained according to the second synchronization broadcast block, and the improved random access wireless network temporary identifier is associated with the first physical random access channel timing and/or the second physical random access channel timing.
  • the first improved random access radio network temporary identifier is associated with a first physical random access channel opportunity
  • the second improved random access radio network temporary identifier is associated with a second physical random access channel opportunity.
  • the first preset condition includes: if the first physical random access channel timing obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block and the second synchronization broadcast block is the same as the second physical random access channel timing in the time domain, and the terminal device does not support sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same time.
  • the second preset condition includes: if the first physical random access channel occasion obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block and the second synchronization broadcast block are different from the second physical random access channel occasion in the time domain, and the terminal device does not support sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same time.
  • the random access channel occasion (for example: PRACH occasion) is different in the time domain, which means that the two PRACH occasions are separated by at least X time units in the time domain, and optionally, X is an integer.
  • the third preset condition includes: if the first physical random access channel timing obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block and the second synchronization broadcast block is the same as the second physical random access channel timing, and the terminal device supports sending random access preambles to two network devices respectively at the same time.
  • This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by selecting or determining the first group of synchronization broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronization broadcast blocks based on radio resource control signaling and/or system information; selecting or determining the first physical random access channel opportunity based on the first synchronization broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or selecting or determining the second physical random access channel opportunity based on the second synchronization broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information.
  • the terminal device can select two PRACH occasions to send random access preambles to two network devices, and can distinguish between two different random access processes, thereby improving the accuracy of timing adjustment.
  • the control method includes the following steps:
  • S0 Send downlink information so that the terminal device can adjust the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
  • the downlink information sent by the network device includes at least one of radio resource control signaling, system information, downlink control information and a synchronization broadcast block.
  • the wireless resource control signaling and/or system information includes a synchronization broadcast block position parameter in a burst, a synchronization broadcast block number parameter for each element, an element arrangement pattern parameter, a group parameter, a group status parameter, a short bitmap parameter, a medium bitmap parameter, and at least one of a long bitmap parameter.
  • the downlink control information includes first downlink control information and/or second downlink control information.
  • the terminal device after receiving the downlink information sent by the network device, the terminal device selects or determines the physical random access channel timing according to the downlink information, sends the corresponding random access preamble at the physical random access channel timing, receives the random access response corresponding to the random access preamble in the random access response window, and adjusts the timing of the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal according to the timing advance command in the random access response.
  • the terminal device selects or determines the first group of synchronous broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronous broadcast blocks based on the wireless resource control signaling and/or system information in the downlink information; selects or determines the first physical random access channel timing based on the first synchronous broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or selects or determines the second physical random access channel timing based on the second synchronous broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information.
  • the terminal device determines how to perform SSB grouping through various parameters, including the terminal device selecting or determining the synchronized broadcast block for transmission based on the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the burst; and/or, adding a second synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the burst to the service cell common system information block configuration information element and/or the service cell common configuration information element; and/or, adding a second group of in-group parameters and group status parameters, and/or at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters to the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the burst.
  • the method further comprises at least one of the following:
  • the terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the first burst, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the second burst;
  • the terminal device groups candidate synchronized broadcast blocks and/or synchronized broadcast blocks for transmission according to the synchronized broadcast block number parameter of each element and/or the arrangement pattern parameter of the element to obtain a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks;
  • the terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the first group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the second group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters;
  • the terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on at least one of the first group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters.
  • the method further comprises at least one of the following:
  • the terminal device selects or determines the first synchronous broadcast block based on the first downlink control information and/or the first group of synchronous broadcast blocks;
  • the terminal device selects or determines the second synchronization broadcast block based on the second downlink control information and/or the second group of synchronization broadcast blocks.
  • the terminal device selects or determines the first physical random access channel timing according to the first synchronization broadcast block index value and/or the first physical random access channel mask index value in the first downlink control information, and/or selects or determines the second physical random access channel timing according to the second synchronization broadcast block index value and/or the second physical random access channel mask index value in the second downlink control information;
  • the network device designs a constraint relationship for the association method between the synchronous broadcast block and the physical random access channel opportunity, and the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the first synchronous broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the second synchronous broadcast block;
  • the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or selects one from the subsequently available physical random access channel opportunities corresponding to the second synchronization broadcast block as the second physical random access channel opportunity;
  • the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity according to the second synchronization broadcast block;
  • the terminal device adds the network device identifier to the random access wireless network temporary identifier calculation formula to obtain an improved random access wireless network temporary identifier, and obtains the first physical random access channel timing according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel timing according to the second synchronization broadcast block, and associates the improved random access wireless network temporary identifier with the first physical random access channel timing and/or the second physical random access channel timing.
  • the network device after the network device receives the first random access preamble sent by the terminal device, the network device sends a random access response including a first timing advance command, and optionally, the first timing advance command is used for the terminal device to perform timing adjustment on the first physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal;
  • the network device After the network device receives the second random access preamble sent by the terminal device, it sends a random access response including a second timing advance command.
  • the second timing advance command is used for the terminal device to perform timing adjustment on the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal.
  • the network device receives the first physical uplink channel and/or reference signal sent by the terminal device after the timing adjustment is performed by the first timing advance command; and/or the network device receives the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal sent by the terminal device after the timing adjustment is performed by the second timing advance command, and the timing adjustment process is completed.
  • This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by sending downlink information so that the terminal device adjusts the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
  • the random access process can be performed based on a specific network device, so that the timing calculation and adjustment of the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal of any network device are more accurate.
  • this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
  • the terminal device may be in a single network device or multiple network device scenario, and the terminal device determines when to group the synchronization broadcast block (SSB, Synchronization Signal and PBCH block) in an implicit and/or explicit manner, that is, to associate different SSBs with different network devices.
  • the terminal device determines how to group the SSBs through various parameters, including indicating the SSB grouping through the number of SSBs in each element and/or the arrangement pattern of the elements.
  • all candidate SSBs are grouped according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divided into two groups of candidate SSBs, each group of candidate SSBs is associated with a network device.
  • SCS sub-carrier spacing
  • the index value of the first symbol of the candidate SSB is: ⁇ 2,8 ⁇ +14*n.
  • Figure 9 is a first principle schematic diagram of the control method according to the fifth embodiment, and the arrangement of all candidate SSBs is shown in Figure 9.
  • Figure 10 is a second principle schematic diagram of the control method according to the fifth embodiment, and the arrangement of all candidate SSBs is shown in Figure 10.
  • Figure 11 is a third principle schematic diagram of the control method according to the fifth embodiment, and the arrangement of all candidate SSBs is shown in Figure 11.
  • the terminal device groups all candidate SSBs according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements into two groups of candidate SSBs, and each group of candidate SSBs is associated with a network device.
  • one or more SSBs for transmission are indicated by an SSB position parameter in a burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst) in a serving cell common configuration information element and/or a serving cell common system information block configuration information element.
  • a burst e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst
  • the one or more SSBs for transmission are sent from the first network device; and/or, if one or more SSBs for transmission are candidate SSBs corresponding to a second network device, the one or more SSBs for transmission are sent from the second network device.
  • the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the first network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for a subsequent random access channel (RACH) process; and/or, the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the second network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for a subsequent RACH process.
  • RACH random access channel
  • This embodiment uses the above scheme to group all candidate SSBs according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divides them into two groups of candidate SSBs, each group of candidate SSBs is associated with a network device.
  • the arrangement pattern of the elements e.g., a cyclic arrangement pattern or a half-half arrangement pattern
  • the candidate SSBs are grouped according to an arrangement pattern of the elements, and the arrangement of the elements is relatively concise and regular, and/or, the SSB position parameter in the burst of the existing protocol can be reused to indicate the SSB used for transmission, without the need for additional enhancement of the SSB used for transmission.
  • this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
  • the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst (for example: ssb-PositionsInBurst) in the serving cell common configuration information element and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element are grouped and divided into two groups of SSBs for transmission, each group being sent from one network device.
  • the SSB position parameter in the burst in the serving cell common configuration information element and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element indicates the SSB used for transmission.
  • the number of SSBs used for transmission is at least 2.
  • the number of SSBs used for transmission is an even number.
  • the index value of the first symbol of the candidate SSB is: ⁇ 2,8 ⁇ +14*n.
  • Figure 12 is a first principle schematic diagram of the control method according to the sixth embodiment, and the arrangement of all SSBs for transmission is shown in Figure 12.
  • Figure 13 is a second principle schematic diagram of the control method according to the sixth embodiment, and the arrangement of all SSBs for transmission is shown in Figure 13.
  • the terminal device groups the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst) in the serving cell common configuration information element and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element according to the number of SSBs in each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divides them into two groups of SSBs for transmission, each group being sent from one network device.
  • the SSB position parameter in the burst e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst
  • the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the first network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for use in a subsequent RACH process; and/or, the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the second network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for use in a subsequent RACH process.
  • This embodiment uses the above scheme, specifically by grouping the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst in the serving cell common configuration information element and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element according to the number of SSBs in each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, into two groups of SSBs for transmission, each group being sent from a network device.
  • the arrangement pattern of the elements e.g., a cyclic arrangement pattern or a half-by-half arrangement pattern
  • it is simple and direct to directly group the SSBs for transmission according to an arrangement pattern of the elements, and the arrangement of the elements is relatively concise and regular.
  • this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
  • two groups of SSBs for transmission are also directly indicated through a serving cell common system information block configuration information element and/or a serving cell common configuration information element.
  • a serving cell common system information block configuration information element (eg, ServingCellConfigCommonSIB) is configured via system information block 1 (eg, SIB1), and the information element is used to provide cell parameters.
  • system information block 1 eg, SIB1
  • directly adding an SSB position parameter in the second burst to indicate the SSB used by the second network device for transmission specifically includes:
  • a second SSB position parameter in burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst2) is added to the serving cell common system information block configuration information element, which includes two parameters, namely, a group parameter (e.g., inOneGroup) and a group state parameter (e.g., groupPresence).
  • the first SSB position parameter in burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst) is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission by the first network device
  • the second SSB position parameter in burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst2) is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission by the second network device.
  • a group parameter including a first burst SSB position parameter and a second burst SSB position parameter.
  • a maximum of 4 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, only the leftmost 4 bits of the parameter are valid; when a maximum of 8 or 64 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, all 8 bits of the parameter are valid.
  • the first/leftmost bit in the parameter corresponds to SSB 0, the second bit corresponds to SSB 1, and so on.
  • the first/leftmost bit in the parameter corresponds to the first SSB in a group (for example: SSB 0, SSB 8, and so on), and the second bit corresponds to the second SSB in a group (for example: SSB 1, SSB 9, and so on). If a bit value in the parameter is 0, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is not used for transmission; if a bit value in the parameter is 1, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is used for transmission.
  • group status parameter includes group status parameters in the SSB position parameter in the first burst and the SSB position parameter in the second burst.
  • the first/leftmost bit in this parameter corresponds to SSB 0-7
  • the second bit corresponds to SSB 8-15, and so on. If a bit value in this parameter is 0, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is not used for transmission; if a bit value in this parameter is 1, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is used for transmission.
  • a second set of parameters is added through the SSB position parameter in the burst to indicate the SSB used by the second network device for transmission, specifically including:
  • the first in-group parameter (e.g., inOneGroup) and the first group status parameter (e.g., groupPresence) are used to indicate the SSB for transmission of the first network device
  • the second in-group parameter (e.g., inOneGroup2) and the second group status parameter (e.g., groupPresence2) are used to indicate the SSB for transmission of the second network device.
  • the use of each parameter is as follows:
  • a group parameter includes a first in a group parameter and a second in a group parameter.
  • a maximum of 4 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, only the leftmost 4 bits of this parameter are valid; when a maximum of 8 or 64 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, all 8 bits of this parameter are valid.
  • the first/leftmost bit in this parameter corresponds to SSB 0, the second bit corresponds to SSB 1, and so on.
  • the first/leftmost bit in this parameter corresponds to the first SSB in a group (for example: SSB 0, SSB8, and so on), and the second bit corresponds to the second SSB in a group (for example: SSB 1, SSB 9, and so on). If a bit value in this parameter is 0, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is not used for transmission; if a bit value in this parameter is 1, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is used for transmission.
  • group status parameter includes a first group status parameter and a second group status parameter.
  • the first/leftmost bit in this parameter corresponds to SSB 0-7
  • the second bit corresponds to SSB 8-15, and so on. If a bit value in this parameter is 0, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is not used for transmission; if a bit value in this parameter is 1, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is used for transmission.
  • the indication through the serving cell common configuration information element includes directly adding an SSB position parameter in a second burst and/or adding a second set of parameters to the SSB position parameter in the burst to indicate the SSB used by the second network device for transmission.
  • directly adding the SSB position parameter in the second burst to indicate the SSB used by the second network device for transmission specifically includes:
  • the second SSB position parameter in the burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst2) is added to the serving cell common configuration information element, which includes three parameters: a short bitmap parameter (e.g., shortBitmap), a medium bitmap parameter (e.g., mediumBitmap), and a long bitmap parameter (e.g., longBitmap).
  • a short bitmap parameter e.g., shortBitmap
  • a medium bitmap parameter e.g., mediumBitmap
  • a long bitmap parameter e.g., longBitmap
  • the first SSB position parameter in the burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst) is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission by the first network device
  • the second SSB position parameter in the burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst2) is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission by the second network device.
  • Short bitmap parameter includes the short bitmap parameter in the SSB position parameter in the first burst and the SSB position parameter in the second burst. When a maximum of 4 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, this parameter is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission of the corresponding network device.
  • Middle bitmap parameter includes the middle bitmap parameter in the SSB position parameter in the first burst and the SSB position parameter in the second burst. When a maximum of 8 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, this parameter is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission of the corresponding network device.
  • Long bitmap parameter includes the long bitmap parameter in the SSB position parameter in the first burst and the SSB position parameter in the second burst. When a maximum of 64 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, this parameter is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission of the corresponding network device.
  • adding a second set of parameters through an SSB position parameter in a burst to indicate that the second network device uses an SSB for transmission specifically includes:
  • a second short bitmap parameter e.g., shortBitmap2
  • a second medium bitmap parameter e.g., mediumBitmap2
  • a second long bitmap parameter e.g., longBitmap2
  • the first short bitmap parameter (e.g., shortBitmap), the first medium bitmap parameter (e.g., mediumBitmap), and the first long bitmap parameter (e.g., longBitmap) are used to indicate the SSB for transmission of the first network device;
  • the second short bitmap parameter (e.g., shortBitmap2), the second medium bitmap parameter (e.g., mediumBitmap2), and the second long bitmap parameter (e.g., longBitmap2) are used to indicate the SSB for transmission of the second network device.
  • Short bitmap parameter includes the first short bitmap parameter and the second short bitmap parameter. When a maximum of 4 bits can be transmitted in each half frame, this parameter is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission of the corresponding network device.
  • Middle bitmap parameter includes the first middle bitmap parameter and the second middle bitmap parameter. When a maximum of 8 bits can be transmitted in each half frame, this parameter is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission of the corresponding network device.
  • Long bitmap parameter includes the first long bitmap parameter and the second long bitmap parameter. When a maximum of 64 bits can be transmitted in each half frame, this parameter is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission of the corresponding network device.
  • the SSBs used for transmission of the first and second network devices can be obtained through two/groups of parameters, and any SSB used for transmission of the first network device can be different from the SSB used for transmission of the second network device. For example, if SSB 0 is the SSB used for transmission of the first network device, then SSB 0 is not the SSB used for transmission of the second network device. In addition, if the terminal device capability supports it, the same SSB can be indicated for different network devices. At this time, the configuration of these two/groups of parameters is not restricted, and the SSBs used for transmission of the first and second network devices can be flexibly indicated.
  • the terminal device can directly obtain the SSB for transmission of the first and second network devices through two parameters (for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2) or two groups of parameters (for example, two groups of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two groups of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap and longBitmap).
  • two parameters for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2
  • two groups of parameters for example, two groups of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two groups of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap and longBitmap.
  • the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the first network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for use in a subsequent RACH process; and/or, the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the second network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for use in a subsequent RACH process.
  • This embodiment uses the above solution to directly indicate two groups of SSBs for transmission through the serving cell common system information block configuration information element and/or the serving cell common configuration information element.
  • Two network devices can be flexibly instructed to transmit any SSB without being restricted by the arrangement pattern of the elements; when transmitting the same number of SSBs, not only multiple arrangement patterns of elements can be realized, but also other irregular arrangement patterns can be realized, and the coverage of SSB can be flexibly adjusted.
  • this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
  • the terminal device selects two best SSBs for two network devices, and obtains two PRACH occasions that are the same in the time domain according to the two best SSBs, the terminal device uses the same PRACH occasion in the time domain when sending random access preambles (e.g., preambles) to the two network devices, which places high requirements on the capabilities of the terminal device.
  • random access preambles e.g., preambles
  • the terminal device does not support sending random access preambles to the first network device and the second network device at the same time, in order to avoid sending random access preambles to the two network devices at the same PRACH occasion in the time domain, the following methods are designed:
  • the random access preamble is sent directly on different PRACH occasions in the time domain.
  • the terminal device For sending a random access preamble in a subsequent available PRACH occasion corresponding to an SSB, if the terminal device needs to send a random access preamble to two network devices, and the best SSBs selected for the two network devices are associated with the same PRACH occasion in the time domain, the terminal device does not expect to send a random access preamble to the two network devices in the same PRACH occasion in the time domain, that is: the terminal device selects two different PRACH occasions in the time domain to send a random access preamble to the two network devices. At this time, the terminal device first sends a random access preamble to one of the network devices, which can be the first network device or the second network device.
  • the terminal device obtains the subsequent available PRACH occasion associated with the other network device according to the best SSB corresponding to the other network device, and the terminal device selects a PRACH occasion from it to send a random access preamble to the network device.
  • the terminal device can select the next available PRACH occasion to send a random access preamble.
  • the subsequently available PRACH occasion may be a subsequently available PRACH occasion in the time domain.
  • the subsequently available PRACH occasion refers to a PRACH occasion with a larger index value.
  • FIG. 14 is a first principle schematic diagram of a control method according to the eighth embodiment.
  • a subsequent available PRACH occasion is selected in the time domain.
  • the number of SSBs transmitted in one SSB burst period is 8
  • the frequency division multiplexing parameter of message 1 e.g., msg1-FDM
  • the number of SSBs N for each random access channel opportunity is 2.
  • N is provided by the number of SSBs for each random access channel opportunity and the contention-based preamble number parameter for each SSB (e.g., ssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB).
  • the best SSBs corresponding to the first network device and the second network device are SSB 0 and SSB 1, respectively, and the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the first network device in PRACH occasion 1; for the second network device, the PRACH occasion 1 of the next random access channel configuration period is a subsequently available PRACH occasion, and the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the second network device in the PRACH occasion 1 of the next period.
  • a constraint relationship is designed for the association method of SSB and PRACH occasion, and the terminal device selects two optimal SSBs for two network devices, thereby obtaining two PRACH occasions that are different in the time domain based on the two optimal SSBs.
  • the network device sets the frequency division multiplexing parameter of message 1 to 1 and/or sets the number of SSBs N for each random access channel opportunity to 1.
  • the terminal device selects two optimal SSBs for two network devices, namely: a first SSB and a second SSB, obtains a first PRACH occasion based on the constraint relationship and the first SSB, and/or obtains a second PRACH occasion based on the constraint relationship and the second SSB, wherein the two PRACH occasions are different in the time domain.
  • the terminal device can directly send random access preambles to the two network devices in the corresponding PRACH occasions, and optionally, X is an integer, which can be obtained by at least one method such as setting by default value, obtaining according to the terminal device capability, and indicating by the network device;
  • the time unit can be at least one of a symbol (e.g., symbol), a time slot (e.g., slot), a subframe (e.g., subframe), a frame (e.g., frame), a millisecond (e.g., ms), and a second (e.g., s).
  • the terminal device can directly send random access preambles to the
  • FIG. 15 is a second principle schematic diagram of the control method according to the eighth embodiment.
  • two PRACH occasions associated with two optimal SSBs are different in the time domain.
  • 8 SSBs are transmitted in one SSB burst cycle
  • the frequency division multiplexing parameter of message 1 is 4
  • the number of SSBs N for each random access channel opportunity is 1.
  • the optimal SSBs corresponding to the first network device and the second network device are SSB 0 and SSB 5, respectively, and the terminal device sends random access preambles to the first network device and the second network device at PRACH occasion 1 and PRACH occasion 6, respectively.
  • the random access preamble is sent by a subsequent available PRACH occasion corresponding to the SSB; and/or, a constraint relationship is designed for the association method between the SSB and the PRACH occasion; and/or, the random access preamble is directly sent at PRACH occasions that are different in the time domain, and the terminal device can select two different PRACH occasions to send the random access preamble to the two network devices.
  • the two different PRACH occasions are different in the time domain to avoid sending the random access preamble to the two network devices at the same time.
  • this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
  • the terminal device if the terminal device supports sending a random access preamble to two network devices at the same time, and the best SSBs selected for the two network devices are associated with the same PRACH occasion in the time domain, the terminal device can send a random access preamble to the first network device and the second network device at the same PRACH occasion in the time domain. Therefore, if the terminal device supports sending a random access preamble to two network devices at the same time, regardless of whether the two PRACH occasions are the same, the terminal device can directly send a random access preamble to the two network devices at the two PRACH occasions.
  • a terminal device may directly send a random access preamble to two network devices at two identical PRACH occasions, wherein the two PRACH occasions are identical in both time domain and frequency domain;
  • a second example a terminal device may directly send a random access preamble to two network devices at two identical PRACH occasions in time domain, wherein the two PRACH occasions are identical in time domain but different in frequency domain;
  • a third example a terminal device may directly send a random access preamble to two network devices at two identical PRACH occasions in frequency domain, wherein the two PRACH occasions are identical in frequency domain but different in time domain;
  • the terminal device may select two random access preambles to send to two network devices respectively, monitor/receive a first physical downlink control channel according to a random access wireless network temporary identifier in a control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource set pool is 0, and the downlink control channel includes downlink control information for scheduling a random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble; monitor/receive a second physical downlink control channel according to a random access wireless network temporary identifier in a control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource set pool is 1, and the downlink control channel includes downlink control information for scheduling a random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble.
  • each random access process corresponds to a random access radio network temporary identifier (RA-RNTI, Random Access Radio Network Temporary Identifier), it can be used to distinguish the random access process.
  • the network device identifier can be added to the existing random access radio network temporary identifier calculation formula to achieve the purpose of distinguishing the random access preambles sent to two different network devices.
  • the network device identifier is added after the uplink carrier index value (for example: ul_carrier_id) in the existing random access radio network temporary identifier calculation formula.
  • the specific RA-RNTI calculation formula is:
  • RA-RNTI 1+s_id+14 ⁇ t_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ f_id+14 ⁇ 80 ⁇ 8 ⁇ (ul_carrier_id+G)
  • s_id is the first OFDM symbol index value of PRACH occasion
  • t_id is the index value of the first time slot of PRACH occasion in a system frame
  • f_id is the index value of PRACH occasion in the frequency domain
  • ul_carrier_id is the index value of the uplink carrier of the random access preamble transmission.
  • G is the network device identifier, and the following options are possible: a) The value of G is consistent with the value of the control resource set pool index parameter (for example, coresetPoolIndex), for example, coresetPoolIndex is 0 to identify the first network device, and the value of G is 0; coresetPoolIndex is 1 to identify the second network device, and the value of G is 1; b) It is identified by the index value of the SSB group; c) Since the value of ul_carrier_id is 0 or 1, the value of G can be a number greater than 1 to distinguish the network device identifier, for example, G is 2 to indicate that the random access is directed to the first network device before sending, and G is 3 to indicate that the random access is directed to the second network device before sending, and vice versa; d) G depends on the timing advance group index value (TAG, Timing Advance Group), for example, the timing advance group index value is 0, G depends on 0; the timing advance group index value is
  • a first physical downlink control channel is monitored/received according to an enhanced random access wireless network temporary identifier corresponding to a first network device, and the downlink control channel includes downlink control information for scheduling a random access response corresponding to a first random access preamble; and/or, in a control resource set whose control resource set pool index parameter value is 1, a second physical downlink control channel is monitored/received according to an enhanced random access wireless network temporary identifier corresponding to a second network device, and the downlink control channel includes downlink control information for scheduling a random access response corresponding to a second random access preamble.
  • the terminal device supports sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same time, the distinction is made by controlling the resource set pool index parameter identifier; and/or, the enhanced random access wireless network temporary identifier is used to distinguish.
  • the terminal device can send random access preambles to two network devices through the same PRACH occasion in two time domains, and can distinguish two different random access processes.
  • this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
  • a control resource pool index parameter e.g., coresetPoolIndex
  • a physical downlink control channel transmitted in a control resource set whose control resource pool index parameter value is 0 or other physical channels/reference signals scheduled by the physical downlink control channel are associated with a first network device
  • a physical downlink control channel transmitted in a control resource set whose control resource pool index parameter value is 1 or other physical channels/reference signals scheduled by the physical downlink control channel are associated with a second network device.
  • the terminal device performs timing adjustment on the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal according to the timing advance command in the random access response, including uplink timing adjustment based on non-competition random access and/or uplink timing adjustment based on competition random access.
  • a non-contention-based random access process may be performed on two network devices respectively, and the steps are as follows:
  • the first step transmitting a first physical downlink control channel from a control resource set having an index parameter value of 0 in a control resource set pool, the first physical downlink control channel including downlink control information (e.g., DCI), that is, sending downlink control information from a first network device, the downlink control information including a first random access preamble index value (e.g., Random Access Preamble index), a first SSB index value (e.g., SS/PBCH index), and a first physical random access channel mask index value (e.g., PRACH Mask Index); and/or, transmitting a second physical downlink control channel from a control resource set having an index parameter value of 1 in a control resource set pool, the second physical downlink control channel including downlink control information, that is, sending downlink control information from a second network device, the downlink control information including a second random access preamble index value, a second SSB index value, and a second physical random access channel mask index value.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the random access preamble index value when the first random access preamble index value is not all 0, it indicates that non-contention-based random access is triggered; and/or, when the second random access preamble index value is not all 0, it indicates that non-contention-based random access is triggered.
  • the random access preamble index value is configured by a random access preamble index value parameter (e.g., ra-PreambleIndex).
  • the SSB for transmission is divided into two groups, corresponding to the first and second network devices, respectively, the first network device selects a first SSB index value from the SSB for transmission corresponding to the first network device, and/or the second network device selects a second SSB index value from the SSB for transmission corresponding to the second network device, and the two groups of SSBs for transmission are grouped in the following manner:
  • Grouping candidate SSBs All candidate SSBs are grouped according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements into two groups of candidate SSBs. Then, two groups of SSBs for transmission are obtained by combining the SSB position parameters in the burst.
  • the terminal device groups the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst according to the number of SSBs in each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divides them into two groups of SSBs for transmission.
  • Two sets of SSBs for transmission can be directly obtained through two parameters (for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2) or two sets of parameters (for example, two sets of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two sets of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap, and longBitmap).
  • two parameters for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2
  • two sets of parameters for example, two sets of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two sets of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap, and longBitmap.
  • Step 2 The terminal device determines the first PRACH occasion according to the first SSB index value and the first physical random access channel mask index value, and sends the first random access preamble to the first network device at the first PRACH occasion; and/or, the terminal device determines the second PRACH occasion according to the second SSB index value and the second physical random access channel mask index value, and sends the second random access preamble to the second network device at the second PRACH occasion.
  • the terminal device determines the first PRACH occasion according to the first SSB index value and the first physical random access channel mask index value, and sends the first random access preamble to the first network device at the first PRACH occasion; and/or, the terminal device determines the second PRACH occasion according to the second SSB index value and the second physical random access channel mask index value, and sends the second random access preamble to the second network device at the second PRACH occasion.
  • the terminal device determines the first PRACH occasion according to the first SSB index value and the first physical random access channel mask index value, and send
  • the terminal device can directly send the random access preamble to the first network device in the first PRACH occasion, and directly send the random access preamble to the second network device in the second PRACH occasion.
  • the terminal device does not support sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same time, the terminal device does not expect to transmit random access preambles in the same PRACH occasion in the time domain.
  • the two PRACH occasions can be different in the time domain by configuring the SSB index value and the physical random access channel mask index value. For example: when the SSB index value and/or the physical random access channel mask index value are configured to be different, and for another example: when the physical random access channel mask index value is 0/9/10, the terminal device can select two different PRACH occasions in the time domain.
  • Step 3 Transmit the first physical downlink control channel from the control resource set with an index parameter value of 0 in the control resource set pool, the first physical downlink control channel includes downlink control information, and the downlink control message schedules a random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble, that is, the random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble is sent from the first network device; and/or, transmit the second physical downlink control channel from the control resource set with an index parameter value of 1 in the control resource set pool, the second physical downlink control channel includes downlink control information, and the downlink control message schedules a random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble, that is, the random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble is sent from the second network device.
  • the following technical features are included:
  • the terminal device assumes that the first physical downlink control channel including the first random access preamble index value and the first physical downlink control channel including the downlink control information of the scheduling random access response have the same demodulation reference signal (DMRS) antenna port quasi co-location characteristic (QCL), and/or, the second physical downlink control channel including the second random access preamble index value and the second physical downlink control channel including the downlink control information of the scheduling random access response have the same demodulation reference signal antenna port quasi co-location characteristic.
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • QCL quasi co-location characteristic
  • the random access responses corresponding to the first and second random access preambles are received in the first and second random access response windows, respectively.
  • the first random access response window starts at the first symbol of the earliest control resource set, which is a physical downlink control channel used by the terminal device to receive a type 1 physical downlink control channel common search space set (e.g., Type1-PDCCH CSS set).
  • a control resource set pool index parameter value associated with the control resource set is 0, and at the same time, the start symbol of the first random access response window is at least one symbol away from the last symbol of the first PRACH occasion; and/or, the second random access response window starts at the first symbol of the earliest control resource set.
  • a control resource set pool index parameter value associated with the control resource set is 1, and at the same time, the start symbol of the second random access response window is at least one symbol away from the last symbol of the second PRACH occasion.
  • the random access responses corresponding to the first and second random access preambles respectively include a first media access control layer (MAC) random access response (RAR) and a second MAC random access response, wherein the first MAC random access response includes a first timing advance command (e.g., Timing Advance Command), and/or the second MAC random access response includes a second timing advance command.
  • MAC media access control layer
  • RAR media access control layer
  • the first MAC random access response includes a first timing advance command (e.g., Timing Advance Command)
  • the second MAC random access response includes a second timing advance command.
  • the first timing advance command is calculated by the first network device according to the first random access preamble
  • the second timing advance command is calculated by the second network device according to the second random access preamble.
  • the first MAC random access response includes a first network device identifier, which is used to indicate that the first timing advance command is applied to uplink transmission to the first network device; and/or the second MAC random access response includes a second network device identifier, which is used to indicate that the second timing advance command is applied to uplink transmission to the second network device.
  • the network device identifier may be a random preamble sequence group index value or an SSB group index value.
  • Step 4 The first physical uplink channel (e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH)/reference signal (e.g., SRS) scheduled by the physical downlink control channel transmitted by the control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource pool is 0 is adjusted in timing using the first timing advance command; and/or, the second physical uplink channel/reference signal scheduled by the physical downlink control channel transmitted by the control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource pool is 1 is adjusted in timing using the second timing advance command.
  • PUSCH/PUCCH e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH
  • SRS reference signal scheduled by the physical downlink control channel transmitted by the control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource pool is 0 is adjusted in timing using the first timing advance command
  • the second physical uplink channel/reference signal scheduled by the physical downlink control channel transmitted by the control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource pool is 1 is adjusted in timing using the second timing advance command.
  • This embodiment uses the above solution to improve the accuracy of timing adjustment by performing non-contention-based random access to two network devices respectively in a scenario of multiple network devices based on multiple downlink control information.
  • this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
  • control resource pool index parameter for example: coresetPoolIndex
  • coresetPoolIndex the physical downlink control channel transmitted in the control resource set whose control resource pool index parameter value is 0 or other physical channels/reference signals scheduled by the physical downlink control channel are all associated with the first network device; the physical downlink control channel transmitted in the control resource set whose control resource pool index parameter value is 1 or other physical channels/reference signals scheduled by the physical downlink control channel are all associated with the second network device.
  • the terminal device performs timing adjustment on the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal according to the timing advance command in the random access response, including uplink timing adjustment based on non-competition random access and/or uplink timing adjustment based on competition random access.
  • contention-based random access includes contention-based random access initiated by a terminal device and contention-based random access initiated by a network device.
  • contention-based random access initiated by a terminal device includes type 1 random access and type 2 random access.
  • Contention-based random access initiated by a network device is to instruct a terminal device to perform contention-based random access by sending downlink control information, that is, sending downlink control information from a first network device to trigger a random access process, and/or sending downlink control information from a second network device to trigger a random access process, and optionally, the downlink control information includes a random access preamble index value. When a non-contention-based random access preamble has been used up, a contention-based random access process will be triggered.
  • the non-contention-based random access preamble has been used up, indicating that if a non-contention-based random access preamble corresponding to a network device has been used up, the network device will trigger a contention-based random access process.
  • a contention-based random access process can be performed to two network devices respectively, and the steps are as follows:
  • Step 1 For contention-based random access initiated by a network device, a first physical downlink control channel is transmitted from a control resource set with a control resource set pool index parameter value of 0, and the first physical downlink control channel includes downlink control information, that is, downlink control information is sent from the first network device, and the downlink control information includes a first random access preamble index value (e.g., Random Access Preamble index); and/or, a second physical downlink control channel is transmitted from a control resource set with a control resource set pool index parameter value of 1, and the second physical downlink control channel includes downlink control information, that is, downlink control information is sent from the second network device, and the downlink control information includes a second random access preamble index value.
  • a first random access preamble index value e.g., Random Access Preamble index
  • the terminal device selects the best SSB and selects the first random access preamble, and then sends the first random access preamble to the first network device, and/or, when the second random access preamble index value is all 0, the terminal device selects the best SSB and selects the second random access preamble, and then sends the second random access preamble to the second network device.
  • the terminal device For contention-based random access initiated by a terminal device, the terminal device directly selects the best SSB and selects the first random access preamble, and then sends the first random access preamble to the first network device, and/or directly selects the best SSB and selects the second random access preamble, and then sends the second random access preamble to the second network device.
  • the SSBs for transmission are divided into two groups, corresponding to the first and second network devices, respectively.
  • the terminal device measures the first group of SSBs sent from the first network device and selects the best SSB therefrom, namely, the first SSB, and/or the terminal device measures the second group of SSBs sent from the second network device and selects the best SSB therefrom, namely, the second SSB.
  • the two groups of SSBs for transmission are grouped in the following manner:
  • Grouping candidate SSBs All candidate SSBs are grouped according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements into two groups of candidate SSBs. Then, two groups of SSBs for transmission are obtained by combining the SSB position parameters in the burst.
  • the terminal device groups the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst according to the number of SSBs in each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divides them into two groups of SSBs for transmission.
  • Two sets of SSBs for transmission can be directly obtained through two parameters (for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2) or two sets of parameters (for example, two sets of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two sets of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap, and longBitmap).
  • two parameters for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2
  • two sets of parameters for example, two sets of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two sets of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap, and longBitmap.
  • Step 2 The terminal device determines the first PRACH occasion according to the first SSB, and/or determines the second PRACH occasion according to the second SSB.
  • the terminal device determines the first PRACH occasion according to the first SSB, and/or determines the second PRACH occasion according to the second SSB.
  • the terminal device can directly send the random access preamble to the first network device in the first PRACH occasion, and the terminal device can directly send the random access preamble to the second network device in the second PRACH occasion.
  • the following method can be used to avoid the terminal device sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same PRACH occasion in the time domain:
  • the second random access process is not performed before the first random access response window expires: the terminal device first sends a random access preamble to one of the network devices, and the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the other network device after the random access response window expires.
  • the terminal device first sends a random access preamble to one network device, and obtains the subsequent available PRACH occasion associated with the other network device according to the best SSB corresponding to the other network device. The terminal device selects a PRACH occasion from them to send a random access preamble to the network device.
  • Step 3 The terminal device sends a first random access preamble to the first network device in the first PRACH occasion, and/or sends a second random access preamble to the second network device in the second PRACH occasion.
  • Step 4 Transmitting a first physical downlink control channel from a control resource set with an index parameter value of 0 in the control resource set pool, the first physical downlink control channel includes downlink control information (e.g., DCI), and the downlink control message schedules a random access response (e.g., MSG2) corresponding to the first random access preamble, that is, sending a random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble from the first network device, and optionally, for type 2 random access, sending an absolute timing advance command MAC CE corresponding to the first random access preamble from the first network device; and/or, transmitting a second physical downlink control channel from a control resource set with an index parameter value of 1 in the control resource set pool, the second physical downlink control channel includes downlink control information, and the downlink control message schedules a random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble, that is, sending a random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble from the second network device, and optionally, for type 2 random access,
  • the terminal device assumes that the physical downlink shared channel of the random access response including the first random access preamble has the same demodulation reference signal antenna port quasi-co-location characteristic as the first SSB, and/or, the physical downlink shared channel of the random access response including the second random access preamble has the same demodulation reference signal antenna port quasi-co-location characteristic as the second SSB.
  • the terminal device assumes that the first physical downlink control channel of the scheduling random access response has the same demodulation reference signal antenna port quasi-co-location characteristic as the first SSB, and/or, the second physical downlink control channel of the scheduling random access response has the same demodulation reference signal antenna port quasi-co-location characteristic as the second SSB.
  • the random access responses corresponding to the first and second random access preambles are received in the first and second random access response windows, respectively.
  • the first random access response window starts at the first symbol of the earliest control resource set, which is a physical downlink control channel used by the terminal device to receive a type 1 physical downlink control channel common search space set (e.g., Type1-PDCCH CSS set).
  • a control resource set pool index parameter value associated with the control resource set is 0, and at the same time, the start symbol of the first random access response window is at least one symbol away from the last symbol of the first PRACH occasion; and/or, the second random access response window starts at the first symbol of the earliest control resource set.
  • a control resource set pool index parameter value associated with the control resource set is 1, and at the same time, the start symbol of the second random access response window is at least one symbol away from the last symbol of the second PRACH occasion.
  • the random access responses corresponding to the first and second random access preambles respectively include a first MAC random access response (e.g., MAC RAR) and a second MAC random access response, wherein the first MAC random access response includes a first timing advance command (e.g., Timing Advance Command), and/or the second MAC random access response includes a second timing advance command, optionally, the first timing advance command is calculated by the first network device according to the first random access preamble, and/or the second timing advance command is calculated by the second network device according to the second random access preamble.
  • a first MAC random access response e.g., MAC RAR
  • a first timing advance command e.g., Timing Advance Command
  • the second MAC random access response includes a second timing advance command
  • the first MAC random access response includes a first network device identifier, which is used to indicate that the first timing advance command is applied to uplink transmission to the first network device; and/or the second MAC random access response includes a second network device identifier, which is used to indicate that the second timing advance command is applied to uplink transmission to the second network device.
  • the network device identifier may be a random preamble sequence group index value or an SSB group index value.
  • Step 5 The first physical uplink channel (e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH)/reference signal (e.g., SRS) scheduled by the physical downlink control channel transmitted by the control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource pool is 0 is adjusted in timing using the first timing advance command; and/or, the second physical uplink channel/reference signal scheduled by the physical downlink control channel transmitted by the control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource pool is 1 is adjusted in timing using the second timing advance command.
  • PUSCH/PUCCH e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH
  • SRS reference signal scheduled by the physical downlink control channel transmitted by the control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource pool is 0 is adjusted in timing using the first timing advance command
  • the second physical uplink channel/reference signal scheduled by the physical downlink control channel transmitted by the control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource pool is 1 is adjusted in timing using the second timing advance command.
  • This embodiment uses the above solution to perform a contention-based random access process.
  • a contention-based random access process can be performed on two network devices respectively, thereby improving the accuracy of timing adjustment.
  • this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
  • a network device eg, a base station
  • sends downlink information including at least one of radio resource control signaling, system information, downlink control information, and a synchronous broadcast block.
  • the wireless resource control signaling and/or system information includes a synchronization broadcast block position parameter in a burst, a synchronization broadcast block number parameter for each element, an element arrangement pattern parameter, a group parameter, a group status parameter, a short bitmap parameter, a medium bitmap parameter, and at least one of a long bitmap parameter.
  • the downlink control information includes first downlink control information and/or second downlink control information.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device receives the downlink information sent by the network device, it selects or determines the physical random access channel opportunity according to the downlink information, sends the corresponding random access preamble at the physical random access channel opportunity, receives the random access response corresponding to the random access preamble in the random access response window, and adjusts the timing of the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal according to the timing advance command in the random access response.
  • the terminal device selects or determines the first group of synchronous broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronous broadcast blocks based on the wireless resource control signaling and/or system information in the downlink information; selects or determines the first physical random access channel timing based on the first synchronous broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or selects or determines the second physical random access channel timing based on the second synchronous broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information.
  • the terminal device determines how to perform SSB grouping through various parameters, including the terminal device selecting or determining the synchronized broadcast block for transmission based on the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the burst; and/or, adding a second synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the burst to the service cell common system information block configuration information element and/or the service cell common configuration information element; and/or, adding a second group of in-group parameters and group status parameters, and/or at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters to the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the burst.
  • the terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to a synchronized broadcast block position parameter in a first burst, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to a synchronized broadcast block position parameter in a second burst;
  • the terminal device groups candidate synchronized broadcast blocks and/or synchronized broadcast blocks for transmission according to the synchronized broadcast block number parameter of each element and/or the arrangement pattern parameter of the element to obtain a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks;
  • the terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the first group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the second group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters;
  • the terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to at least one of the first group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters.
  • the terminal device selects or determines the first synchronous broadcast block based on the first downlink control information and/or the first group of synchronous broadcast blocks;
  • the terminal device selects or determines the second synchronization broadcast block based on the second downlink control information and/or the second group of synchronization broadcast blocks.
  • the terminal device selects or determines the first physical random access channel timing according to the first synchronization broadcast block index value and/or the first physical random access channel mask index value in the first downlink control information, and/or selects or determines the second physical random access channel timing according to the second synchronization broadcast block index value and/or the second physical random access channel mask index value in the second downlink control information;
  • the network device designs a constraint relationship for the association method between the synchronous broadcast block and the physical random access channel opportunity, and the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the first synchronous broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the second synchronous broadcast block;
  • the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or selects one from the subsequently available physical random access channel opportunities corresponding to the second synchronization broadcast block as the second physical random access channel opportunity;
  • the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity according to the second synchronization broadcast block;
  • the terminal device adds the network device identifier to the random access wireless network temporary identifier calculation formula to obtain an improved random access wireless network temporary identifier, and obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity according to the second synchronization broadcast block, and associates the improved random access wireless network temporary identifier with the first physical random access channel opportunity and/or the second physical random access channel opportunity.
  • the network device After the network device receives the first random access preamble sent by the terminal device, it correspondingly sends a random access response including a first timing advance command, and optionally, the first timing advance command is used for the terminal device to perform timing adjustment on the first physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal;
  • the network device After the network device receives the second random access preamble sent by the terminal device, it sends a random access response including a second timing advance command.
  • the second timing advance command is used for the terminal device to perform timing adjustment on the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal.
  • the network device receives the first physical uplink channel and/or reference signal sent by the terminal device after the timing adjustment is performed by the first timing advance command; and/or the network device receives the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal sent by the terminal device after the timing adjustment is performed by the second timing advance command, and the timing adjustment process is completed.
  • this embodiment enables the random access process of the terminal device to be performed based on a specific network device in a scenario of multiple network devices based on multiple downlink control information, so that the timing calculation and adjustment of the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal of any network device are more accurate.
  • Figure 16 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the control device provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the device can be mounted on the terminal device in the above method embodiment, and the device can specifically be a server.
  • the control device shown in Figure 16 can be used to perform some or all of the functions in the method embodiment described in the above embodiment.
  • the control device 110 includes:
  • the control module 111 is configured to adjust the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
  • the downlink information includes at least one of wireless resource control signaling, system information, downlink control information and synchronous broadcast block; and/or, the wireless resource control signaling and/or system information includes a synchronous broadcast block position parameter in a burst, a synchronous broadcast block number parameter for each element, an element arrangement pattern parameter, at least one of a group parameter, a group status parameter, a short bitmap parameter, a medium bitmap parameter and a long bitmap parameter; and/or, the downlink control information includes first downlink control information and/or second downlink control information.
  • control module is further used to:
  • the step of selecting or determining a physical random access channel opportunity based on downlink information includes:
  • a first physical random access channel opportunity is selected or determined based on the first synchronization broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or a second physical random access channel opportunity is selected or determined based on the second synchronization broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information.
  • At least one of the following items is also included:
  • a second group of in-group parameters and group status parameters, and/or at least one of a second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters are added to the synchronous broadcast block position parameters in the burst.
  • the step of selecting or determining the first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on radio resource control signaling and/or system information includes at least one of the following:
  • a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks is obtained according to at least one of the first group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters
  • a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks is obtained according to at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters.
  • the step of selecting or determining a first physical random access channel opportunity based on the first synchronization broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or selecting or determining a second physical random access channel opportunity based on the second synchronization broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information includes at least one of the following:
  • the first preset condition is met, obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or selecting one from the subsequently available physical random access channel opportunities corresponding to the second synchronization broadcast block as a second physical random access channel opportunity;
  • the second preset condition is met, obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtaining a second physical random access channel opportunity according to the second synchronization broadcast block;
  • the network device identifier is added to the random access wireless network temporary identifier calculation formula to obtain an improved random access wireless network temporary identifier, and the first physical random access channel timing is obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or the second physical random access channel timing is obtained according to the second synchronization broadcast block, and the improved random access wireless network temporary identifier is associated with the first physical random access channel timing and/or the second physical random access channel timing.
  • control module is further used for at least one of the following:
  • the second random access preamble is sent at a second physical random access channel opportunity.
  • the method further comprises at least one of the following:
  • the random access response includes a first timing advance command
  • a random access response corresponding to a second random access preamble is received in a second random access response window, and optionally, the random access response includes a second timing advance command.
  • the step of adjusting the timing of the physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal according to the timing advance command includes at least one of the following:
  • the timing of the second physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal is adjusted according to the second timing advance command.
  • control device provided in the embodiment of the present application can execute the technical solution shown in the above method embodiment, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 17 is a second structural schematic diagram of a control device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the control device 120 includes:
  • the sending module 121 is used to send downlink information so that the terminal device adjusts the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
  • the downlink information includes at least one of wireless resource control signaling, system information, downlink control information and synchronous broadcast block; and/or, the wireless resource control signaling and/or system information includes a synchronous broadcast block position parameter in a burst, a synchronous broadcast block number parameter for each element, an element arrangement pattern parameter, at least one of a group parameter, a group status parameter, a short bitmap parameter, a medium bitmap parameter and a long bitmap parameter; and/or, the downlink control information includes first downlink control information and/or second downlink control information.
  • the sending module is further used for at least one of the following:
  • the terminal device selects or determines the physical random access channel timing based on the downlink information
  • the terminal device sends the corresponding random access preamble at the physical random access channel opportunity
  • the terminal device receives a random access response corresponding to the random access preamble in a random access response window
  • the terminal device adjusts the timing of the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal according to the timing advance command in the random access response.
  • the sending module is further used for at least one of the following:
  • the terminal device selects or determines the first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on the radio resource control signaling and/or the system information;
  • the terminal device selects or determines the first physical random access channel timing based on the first synchronization broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or selects or determines the second physical random access channel timing based on the second synchronization broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information.
  • the sending module is further used for at least one of the following:
  • the terminal device selects or determines the synchronous broadcast block for transmission according to the synchronous broadcast block position parameter in the burst;
  • the terminal device adds a synchronization broadcast block position parameter in the second burst in the serving cell common system information block configuration information element and/or the serving cell common configuration information element;
  • the terminal device adds a second group of in-group parameters and group status parameters, and/or at least one of a second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters to the synchronous broadcast block position parameters in the burst.
  • the sending module is further used for at least one of the following:
  • the terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the first burst, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the second burst;
  • the terminal device groups candidate synchronized broadcast blocks and/or synchronized broadcast blocks for transmission according to the synchronized broadcast block number parameter of each element and/or the arrangement pattern parameter of the element to obtain a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks;
  • the terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the first group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the second group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters;
  • the terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to at least one of the first group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters.
  • the sending module is further used for at least one of the following:
  • the terminal device selects or determines the first synchronous broadcast block based on the first downlink control information and/or the first group of synchronous broadcast blocks;
  • the terminal device selects or determines the second synchronization broadcast block based on the second downlink control information and/or the second group of synchronization broadcast blocks.
  • the method further comprises at least one of the following:
  • the terminal device selects or determines the first physical random access channel timing according to the first synchronization broadcast block index value and/or the first physical random access channel mask index value in the first downlink control information, and/or selects or determines the second physical random access channel timing according to the second synchronization broadcast block index value and/or the second physical random access channel mask index value in the second downlink control information;
  • the network device designs a constraint relationship for the association method between the synchronous broadcast block and the physical random access channel opportunity, and the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the first synchronous broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the second synchronous broadcast block;
  • the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or selects one from the subsequently available physical random access channel opportunities corresponding to the second synchronization broadcast block as the second physical random access channel opportunity;
  • the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity according to the second synchronization broadcast block;
  • the terminal device adds the network device identifier to the random access wireless network temporary identifier calculation formula to obtain an improved random access wireless network temporary identifier, and obtains the first physical random access channel timing according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel timing according to the second synchronization broadcast block, and associates the improved random access wireless network temporary identifier with the first physical random access channel timing and/or the second physical random access channel timing.
  • the sending module is further used for at least one of the following:
  • the terminal device performs timing adjustment on the first physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal according to the first timing advance command in the random access response;
  • the terminal device adjusts the timing of the second physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal according to the second timing advance command in the random access response.
  • the method further comprises at least one of the following:
  • a random access response including a second timing advance command is sent.
  • the method further comprises at least one of the following:
  • the receiving terminal device adjusts the timing of the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal and sends the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal after the second timing advance command.
  • control device provided in the embodiment of the present application can execute the technical solution shown in the above method embodiment, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
  • the communication device 140 described in this embodiment can be a terminal device (or a component that can be used for a terminal device) or a network device (or a component that can be used for a network device) mentioned in the aforementioned method embodiment.
  • the communication device 140 can be used to implement the method corresponding to the terminal device or the network device described in the aforementioned method embodiment, and specifically refer to the description in the aforementioned method embodiment.
  • the communication device 140 may include one or more processors 141, which may also be referred to as a processing unit, and may implement certain control or processing functions.
  • the processor 141 may be a general-purpose processor or a dedicated processor, etc. For example, it may be a baseband processor or a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor may be used to process the communication protocol and communication data
  • the central processing unit may be used to control the communication device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor 141 may also store instructions 143 or data (eg, intermediate data).
  • the instructions 143 may be executed by the processor 141, so that the communication device 140 executes the method corresponding to the terminal device or network device described in the above method embodiment.
  • the communication device 140 may include a circuit, which can implement the functions of sending or receiving or communicating in the aforementioned method embodiments.
  • the communication device 140 may include one or more memories 142, on which instructions 144 may be stored. The instructions may be executed on the processor 141, so that the communication device 140 executes the method described in the above method embodiment.
  • data may also be stored in the memory 142.
  • the processor 141 and the memory 142 may be provided separately or integrated together.
  • the communication device 140 may further include a transceiver 145 and/or an antenna 146.
  • the processor 141 may be referred to as a processing unit, and controls the communication device 140 (terminal device or core network device or wireless access network device).
  • the transceiver 145 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and is used to implement the transceiver function of the communication device 140.
  • the transceiver 145 can receive downlink information; and the processor 141 can adjust the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
  • the specific implementation process of the processor 141 and the transceiver 145 can refer to the relevant description of the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the transceiver 145 can send downlink information so that the terminal device adjusts the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
  • the specific implementation process of the processor 141 and the transceiver 145 can refer to the relevant description of the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the processor 141 and the transceiver 145 described in the present application can be implemented in an IC (Integrated Circuit), an analog integrated circuit, an RFIC (Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit), a mixed signal integrated circuit, an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), a PCB (Printed Circuit Board), an electronic device, etc.
  • IC Integrated Circuit
  • RFIC Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • PCB Print Circuit Board
  • the processor 141 and the transceiver 145 can also be manufactured using various integrated circuit process technologies, such as CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor), NMOS (N Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor), PMOS (Positive channel Metal Oxide Semiconductor), BJT (Bipolar Junction Transistor), bipolar CMOS (BiCMOS), silicon germanium (SiGe), gallium arsenide (GaAs), etc.
  • CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
  • NMOS N Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor
  • PMOS Positive channel Metal Oxide Semiconductor
  • BJT Bipolar Junction Transistor
  • BiCMOS bipolar CMOS
  • SiGe silicon germanium
  • GaAs gallium arsenide
  • the communication device may be a terminal device (such as a mobile phone) or a network device (such as a base station), which needs to be determined according to the context.
  • the terminal device may be implemented in various forms.
  • the terminal device described in this application may include mobile terminals such as mobile phones, tablet computers, laptop computers, PDAs, portable media players (PMPs), navigation devices, wearable devices, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc., as well as fixed terminal devices such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
  • the communication device is described by taking a terminal device or a network device as an example, the scope of the communication device described in the present application is not limited to the above terminal device or network device, and the structure of the communication device may not be limited by Figure 21.
  • the communication device may be an independent device or may be part of a larger device.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, including: a terminal device as in any of the above method embodiments; and a network device as in any of the above method embodiments.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, including a memory and a processor, wherein a control program is stored in the memory, and when the control program is executed by the processor, the steps of the control method in any of the above embodiments are implemented.
  • the communication device in the present application can be a terminal device (such as a mobile phone) or a network device (such as a base station), and the specific reference needs to be clarified according to the context.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a storage medium, on which a control program is stored.
  • the control program is executed by a processor, the steps of the control method in any of the above embodiments are implemented.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program code.
  • the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the methods in the above various possible implementation modes.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including a memory and a processor, wherein the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that a device equipped with the chip executes the methods in various possible implementation modes as described above.
  • the units in the device of the embodiment of the present application can be merged, divided and deleted according to actual needs.
  • a computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • a computer program instruction When a computer program instruction is loaded and executed on a computer, a process or function according to an embodiment of the present application is generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • Computer instructions may be stored in a storage medium or transmitted from one storage medium to another storage medium.
  • computer instructions may be transmitted from one website, computer, server or data center to another website, computer, server or data center by wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the storage medium may be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server or data center that includes one or more available media integrated therein. Available media may be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disk, storage disk, tape), optical media (e.g., DVD), or semiconductor media (e.g., solid-state storage disk Solid State Disk (SSD)), etc.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

According to the present application, uplink timing is adjusted on the basis of downlink information, and in a plurality of network device scenarios, a random access process can be carried out on the basis of a specific network device, thereby improving the accuracy of timing adjustment.

Description

控制方法、通信设备及存储介质Control method, communication device and storage medium 技术领域Technical Field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种控制方法、通信设备及存储介质。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a control method, communication equipment and storage medium.
背景技术Background technique
现有协议中,多个网络设备场景下,SSB(Synchronization Signal and PBCH block,同步广播块)不是基于特定一个网络设备进行传输,并且未对SSB进行分组,SSB未与某一个网络设备绑定,在多个网络设备场景中,随机接入过程不能基于特定一个网络设备进行,从而影响定时调整的准确性。In the existing protocol, in the scenario of multiple network devices, SSB (Synchronization Signal and PBCH block) is not transmitted based on a specific network device, and SSB is not grouped. SSB is not bound to a certain network device. In the scenario of multiple network devices, the random access process cannot be performed based on a specific network device, which affects the accuracy of timing adjustment.
因此,有必要提出一种提高定时调整准确性的解决方案。Therefore, it is necessary to propose a solution to improve the accuracy of timing adjustment.
前面的叙述在于提供一般的背景信息,并不一定构成现有技术。The preceding description is intended to provide general background information and does not necessarily constitute prior art.
技术解决方案Technical Solutions
本申请的主要目的在于提供一种控制方法、通信设备及存储介质,旨在提高定时调整的准确性。The main purpose of the present application is to provide a control method, a communication device and a storage medium, aiming to improve the accuracy of timing adjustment.
为实现上述目的,本申请提供的一种控制方法,可应用于终端设备(如手机),包括以下步骤:To achieve the above purpose, the present application provides a control method, which can be applied to a terminal device (such as a mobile phone), comprising the following steps:
S1:基于下行信息调整上行定时。S1: Adjust uplink timing based on downlink information.
本申请还提供一种控制方法,可应用于网络设备(如基站),包括以下步骤:The present application also provides a control method, which can be applied to a network device (such as a base station), comprising the following steps:
S0:发送下行信息,以使终端设备基于下行信息调整上行定时。S0: Send downlink information so that the terminal device can adjust the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
本申请还提供一种通信设备,包括:存储器、处理器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的控制程序,所述控制程序被所述处理器执行时实现如上任一所述的控制方法的步骤。The present application also provides a communication device, comprising: a memory, a processor, and a control program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, wherein the control program implements the steps of any of the control methods described above when executed by the processor.
本申请还提供一种存储介质,所述存储介质上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如上任一所述的控制方法的步骤。The present application also provides a storage medium, on which a computer program is stored. When the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of any of the control methods described above are implemented.
本申请通过基于下行信息调整上行定时,在多个网络设备场景中,使随机接入过程能够基于特定一个网络设备进行,从而提高定时调整的准确性。The present application adjusts the uplink timing based on the downlink information, so that in multiple network device scenarios, the random access process can be performed based on a specific network device, thereby improving the accuracy of the timing adjustment.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
此处的附图被并入说明书中并构成本说明书的一部分,示出了符合本申请的实施例,并与说明书一起用于解释本申请的原理。为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,对于本领域普通技术人员而言,在不付出创造性劳动性的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。The drawings herein are incorporated into the specification and constitute a part of the specification, illustrate embodiments consistent with the present application, and are used together with the specification to explain the principles of the present application. In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the drawings required for use in the description of the embodiments are briefly introduced below. Obviously, for ordinary technicians in this field, other drawings can be obtained based on these drawings without creative labor.
图1为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图;FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal for implementing various embodiments of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络系统架构图;FIG2 is a diagram of a communication network system architecture provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请提供的一种控制器140的硬件结构示意图;FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a controller 140 provided in the present application;
图4为本申请提供的一种网络节点150的硬件结构示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a network node 150 provided in the present application;
图5为根据第一实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG5 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to the first embodiment;
图6为根据第二实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG6 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a second embodiment;
图7为根据第三实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG7 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a third embodiment;
图8为根据第四实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图;FIG8 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a fourth embodiment;
图9为根据第五实施例示出的控制方法的第一原理示意图;FIG9 is a first principle schematic diagram of a control method according to a fifth embodiment;
图10为根据第五实施例示出的控制方法的第二原理示意图;FIG10 is a second principle schematic diagram of a control method according to the fifth embodiment;
图11为根据第五实施例示出的控制方法的第三原理示意图;FIG11 is a third principle schematic diagram of a control method according to the fifth embodiment;
图12为根据第六实施例示出的控制方法的第一原理示意图;FIG12 is a first principle schematic diagram of a control method according to a sixth embodiment;
图13为根据第六实施例示出的控制方法的第二原理示意图;FIG13 is a second principle schematic diagram of a control method according to a sixth embodiment;
图14为根据第八实施例示出的控制方法的第一原理示意图;FIG14 is a first principle schematic diagram of a control method according to an eighth embodiment;
图15为根据第八实施例示出的控制方法的第二原理示意图;FIG15 is a second principle schematic diagram of a control method according to the eighth embodiment;
图16为本申请实施例提供的控制装置的结构示意图一;FIG16 is a first structural diagram of a control device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图17为本申请实施例提供的控制装置的结构示意图二;FIG17 is a second structural schematic diagram of a control device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的通信设备的结构示意图。FIG18 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
本申请目的的实现、功能特点及优点将结合实施例,参照附图做进一步说明。通过上述附图,已示出本申请明确的实施例,后文中将有更详细的描述。这些附图和文字描述并不是为了通过任何方式限制本申请构思的范围,而是通过参考特定实施例为本领域技术人员说明本申请的概念。The realization of the purpose, functional features and advantages of this application will be further described in conjunction with the embodiments and with reference to the accompanying drawings. The above-mentioned drawings have shown clear embodiments of this application, which will be described in more detail later. These drawings and textual descriptions are not intended to limit the scope of the concept of this application in any way, but to illustrate the concept of this application to those skilled in the art by reference to specific embodiments.
本申请的实施方式Embodiments of the present application
这里将详细地对示例性实施例进行说明,其示例表示在附图中。下面的描述涉及附图时,除非另有表示,不同附图中的相同数字表示相同或相似的要素。以下示例性实施例中所描述的实施方式并不代表与本申请相一致的所有实施方式。相反,它们仅是与如所附权利要求书中所详述的、本申请的一些方面相一致的装置和方法的例子。Exemplary embodiments will be described in detail herein, examples of which are shown in the accompanying drawings. When the following description refers to the drawings, unless otherwise indicated, the same numbers in different drawings represent the same or similar elements. The implementations described in the following exemplary embodiments do not represent all implementations consistent with the present application. Instead, they are merely examples of devices and methods consistent with some aspects of the present application as detailed in the appended claims.
需要说明的是,在本文中,术语“包括”、“包含”或者其任何其他变体意在涵盖非排他性的包含,从而使得包括一系列要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置不仅包括那些要素,而且还包括没有明确列出的其他要素,或者是还包括为这种过程、方法、物品或者装置所固有的要素。在没有更多限制的情况下,由语句“包括一个……”限定的要素,并不排除在包括该要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置中还存在另外的相同要素,此外,本申请不同实施例中具有同样命名的部件、特征、要素可能具有相同含义,也可能具有不同含义,其具体含义需以其在该具体实施例中的解释或者进一步结合该具体实施例中上下文进行确定。It should be noted that, in this article, the terms "include", "comprises" or any other variants thereof are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion, so that a process, method, article or device including a series of elements includes not only those elements, but also includes other elements not explicitly listed, or also includes elements inherent to such process, method, article or device. In the absence of further restrictions, an element defined by the sentence "includes a ..." does not exclude the existence of other identical elements in the process, method, article or device including the element. In addition, components, features, and elements with the same name in different embodiments of the present application may have the same meaning or different meanings, and their specific meanings need to be determined by their explanation in the specific embodiment or further combined with the context of the specific embodiment.
应当理解,尽管在本文可能采用术语第一、第二、第三等来描述各种信息,但这些信息不应限于这些术语。这些术语仅用来将同一类型的信息彼此区分开。例如,在不脱离本文范围的情况下,第一信息也可以被称为第二信息,类似地,第二信息也可以被称为第一信息。取决于语境,如在此所使用的词语"如果"可以被解释成为"在……时"或"当……时"或"响应于确定"。再者,如同在本文中所使用的,单数形式“一”、“一个”和“该”旨在也包括复数形式,除非上下文中有相反的指示。应当进一步理解,术语“包含”、“包括”表明存在所述的特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组,但不排除一个或多个其他特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组的存在、出现或添加。本申请使用的术语“或”、“和/或”、“包括以下至少一个”等可被解释为包括性的,或意味着任一个或任何组合。例如,“包括以下至少一个:A、B、C”意味着“以下任一个:A;B;C;A和B;A和C;B和C;A和B和C”,再如,“A、B或C”或者“A、B和/或C”意味着“以下任一个:A;B;C;A和B;A和C;B和C;A和B和C”。仅当元件、功能、步骤或操作的组合在某些方式下内在地互相排斥时,才会出现该定义的例外。It should be understood that, although the terms first, second, third, etc. may be used to describe various information in this article, these information should not be limited to these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish the same type of information from each other. For example, without departing from the scope of this article, the first information may also be referred to as the second information, and similarly, the second information may also be referred to as the first information. Depending on the context, the word "if" as used herein can be interpreted as "at the time of..." or "when..." or "in response to determination". Furthermore, as used in this article, the singular forms "one", "one" and "the" are intended to also include plural forms, unless there is an opposite indication in the context. It should be further understood that the terms "comprising", "including" indicate that there are the described features, steps, operations, elements, components, projects, kinds, and/or groups, but do not exclude the existence, occurrence or addition of one or more other features, steps, operations, elements, components, projects, kinds, and/or groups. The terms "or", "and/or", "including at least one of the following" etc. used in this application can be interpreted as inclusive, or mean any one or any combination. For example, “comprising at least one of the following: A, B, C” means “any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C”, and for another example, “A, B or C” or “A, B and/or C” means “any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C”. An exception to this definition will only occur when a combination of elements, functions, steps or operations are inherently mutually exclusive in some manner.
应该理解的是,虽然本申请实施例中的流程图中的各个步骤按照箭头的指示依次显示,但是这些步骤并不是必然按照箭头指示的顺序依次执行。除非本文中有明确的说明,这些步骤的执行并没有严格的顺序限制,其可以以其他的顺序执行。而且,图中的至少一部分步骤可以包括多个子步骤或者多个阶段,这些子步骤或者阶段并不必然是在同一时刻执行完成,而是可以在不同的时刻执行,其执行顺序也不必然是依次进行,而是可以与其他步骤或者其他步骤的子步骤或者阶段的至少一部分轮流或者交替地执行。It should be understood that, although the various steps in the flowchart in the embodiment of the present application are displayed in sequence according to the indication of the arrows, these steps are not necessarily performed in sequence according to the order indicated by the arrows. Unless there is a clear explanation in this article, the execution of these steps does not have a strict order restriction, and it can be performed in other orders. Moreover, at least a portion of the steps in the figure may include a plurality of sub-steps or a plurality of stages, and these sub-steps or stages are not necessarily performed at the same time, but can be performed at different times, and their execution order is not necessarily performed in sequence, but can be performed in turn or alternately with other steps or at least a portion of the sub-steps or stages of other steps.
取决于语境,如在此所使用的词语“如果”、“若”可以被解释成为“在……时”或“当……时”或“响应于确定”或“响应于检测”。类似地,取决于语境,短语“如果确定”或“如果检测(陈述的条件或事件)”可以被解释成为“当确定时”或“响应于确定”或“当检测(陈述的条件或事件)时”或“响应于检测(陈述的条件或事件)”。As used herein, the words "if" and "if" may be interpreted as "at the time of" or "when" or "in response to determining" or "in response to detecting", depending on the context. Similarly, the phrases "if it is determined" or "if (stated condition or event) is detected" may be interpreted as "when it is determined" or "in response to determining" or "when detecting (stated condition or event)" or "in response to detecting (stated condition or event)", depending on the context.
需要说明的是,在本文中,采用了诸如S1、S2等步骤代号,其目的是为了更清楚简要地表述相应内容,不构成顺序上的实质性限制,本领域技术人员在具体实施时,可能会先执行S2后执行S1等,但这些均应在本申请的保护范围之内。It should be noted that in this article, step codes such as S1 and S2 are used for the purpose of expressing the corresponding content more clearly and concisely, and do not constitute a substantial limitation on the order. When implementing the step, those skilled in the art may execute S2 first and then S1, etc., but these should all be within the scope of protection of this application.
应当理解,此处所描述的具体实施例仅仅用以解释本申请,并不用于限定本申请。It should be understood that the specific embodiments described herein are only used to explain the present application and are not used to limit the present application.
在后续的描述中,使用用于表示元件的诸如“模块”、“部件”或者“单元”的后缀仅为了有利于本申请的说明,其本身没有特定的意义。因此,“模块”、“部件”或者“单元”可以混合地使用。In the subsequent description, the suffixes such as "module", "component" or "unit" used to represent elements are only used to facilitate the description of the present application, and have no specific meanings. Therefore, "module", "component" or "unit" can be used in a mixed manner.
终端设备可以以各种形式来实施。例如,本申请中描述的终端设备可以包括诸如手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、便捷式媒体播放器(Portable Media Player,PMP)、导航装置、可穿戴设备、智能手环、计步器等智能终端设备,以及诸如数字TV、台式计算机等固定终端设备。The terminal device may be implemented in various forms. For example, the terminal device described in this application may include intelligent terminal devices such as mobile phones, tablet computers, laptop computers, PDAs, portable media players (PMPs), navigation devices, wearable devices, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc., as well as fixed terminal devices such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
后续描述中将以移动终端为例进行说明,本领域技术人员将理解的是,除了特别用于移动目的的元件之外,根据本申请的实施方式的构造也能够应用于固定类型的终端设备。The subsequent description will be made by taking a mobile terminal as an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that, in addition to components specifically used for mobile purposes, the construction according to the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to fixed-type terminal devices.
请参阅图1,其为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图,该移动终端100可以包括:RF(Radio Frequency,射频)单元101、WiFi模块102、音频输出单元103、A/V(音频/视频)输入单元104、传感器105、显示单元106、用户输入单元107、接口单元108、存储器109、处理器110、以及电源111等部件。本领域技术人员可以理解,图1中示出的移动终端结构并不构成对移动终端的限定,移动终端可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。Please refer to FIG1, which is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal for implementing various embodiments of the present application. The mobile terminal 100 may include: an RF (Radio Frequency) unit 101, a WiFi module 102, an audio output unit 103, an A/V (audio/video) input unit 104, a sensor 105, a display unit 106, a user input unit 107, an interface unit 108, a memory 109, a processor 110, and a power supply 111. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the mobile terminal structure shown in FIG1 does not constitute a limitation on the mobile terminal, and the mobile terminal may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or arrange the components differently.
下面结合图1对移动终端的各个部件进行具体的介绍:The following is a detailed introduction to the various components of the mobile terminal in conjunction with Figure 1:
射频单元101可用于收发信息或通话过程中,信号的接收和发送,具体的,将基站的下行信息接收后,给处理器110处理;另外,将上行的数据发送给基站。通常,射频单元101包括但不限于天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器、双工器等。此外,射频单元101还可以通过无线通信与网络和其他设备通信。上述无线通信可以使用任一通信标准或协议,包括但不限于GSM(Global System of Mobile communication,全球移动通讯系统)、GPRS(General Packet Radio Service,通用分组无线服务)、CDMA2000(Code Division Multiple Access 2000,码分多址2000)、WCDMA(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,宽带码分多址)、TD-SCDMA(Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access,时分同步码分多址)、FDD-LTE(Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution,频分双工长期演进)、TDD-LTE(Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution,分时双工长期演进)、5G和6G等。The radio frequency unit 101 can be used for receiving and sending signals during information transmission or calls. Specifically, after receiving the downlink information of the base station, it is sent to the processor 110 for processing; in addition, the uplink data is sent to the base station. Generally, the radio frequency unit 101 includes but is not limited to an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, etc. In addition, the radio frequency unit 101 can also communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication. The above-mentioned wireless communications may use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access 2000), WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), FDD-LTE (Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution), TDD-LTE (Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution), 5G and 6G, etc.
WiFi属于短距离无线传输技术,移动终端通过WiFi模块102可以帮助用户收发电子邮件、浏览网页和访问流式媒体等,它为用户提供了无线的宽带互联网访问。虽然图1示出了WiFi模块102,但是可以理解的是,其并不属于移动终 端的必须构成,完全可以根据需要在不改变发明的本质的范围内而省略。WiFi is a short-range wireless transmission technology. The mobile terminal can help users send and receive emails, browse web pages, and access streaming media through the WiFi module 102, which provides users with wireless broadband Internet access. Although FIG1 shows the WiFi module 102, it is understandable that it is not a necessary component of the mobile terminal and can be omitted as needed without changing the essence of the invention.
音频输出单元103可以在移动终端100处于呼叫信号接收模式、通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式、广播接收模式等等模式下时,将射频单元101或WiFi模块102接收的或者在存储器109中存储的音频数据转换成音频信号并且输出为声音。而且,音频输出单元103还可以提供与移动终端100执行的特定功能相关的音频输出(例如,呼叫信号接收声音、消息接收声音等等)。音频输出单元103可以包括扬声器、蜂鸣器等等。The audio output unit 103 can convert the audio data received by the RF unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 or stored in the memory 109 into an audio signal and output it as sound when the mobile terminal 100 is in a call signal reception mode, a talk mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, a broadcast reception mode, etc. Moreover, the audio output unit 103 can also provide audio output related to a specific function performed by the mobile terminal 100 (for example, a call signal reception sound, a message reception sound, etc.). The audio output unit 103 may include a speaker, a buzzer, etc.
A/V输入单元104用于接收音频或视频信号。A/V输入单元104可以包括图形处理器(Graphics Processing Unit,GPU)1041和麦克风1042,图形处理器1041对在视频捕获模式或图像捕获模式中由图像捕获装置(如摄像头)获得的静态图片或视频的图像数据进行处理。处理后的图像帧可以显示在显示单元106上。经图形处理器1041处理后的图像帧可以存储在存储器109(或其它存储介质)中或者经由射频单元101或WiFi模块102进行发送。麦克风1042可以在电话通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式等等运行模式中经由麦克风1042接收声音(音频数据),并且能够将这样的声音处理为音频数据。处理后的音频(语音)数据可以在电话通话模式的情况下转换为可经由射频单元101发送到移动通信基站的格式输出。麦克风1042可以实施各种类型的噪声消除(或抑制)算法以消除(或抑制)在接收和发送音频信号的过程中产生的噪声或者干扰。The A/V input unit 104 is used to receive audio or video signals. The A/V input unit 104 may include a graphics processor (GPU) 1041 and a microphone 1042, and the graphics processor 1041 processes the image data of a static picture or video obtained by an image capture device (such as a camera) in a video capture mode or an image capture mode. The processed image frame can be displayed on the display unit 106. The image frame processed by the graphics processor 1041 can be stored in the memory 109 (or other storage medium) or sent via the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102. The microphone 1042 can receive sound (audio data) via the microphone 1042 in the operation modes such as the telephone call mode, the recording mode, the voice recognition mode, etc., and can process such sound into audio data. The processed audio (voice) data can be converted into a format output that can be sent to a mobile communication base station via the radio frequency unit 101 in the case of the telephone call mode. The microphone 1042 can implement various types of noise elimination (or suppression) algorithms to eliminate (or suppress) noise or interference generated in the process of receiving and sending audio signals.
移动终端100还包括至少一种传感器105,比如光传感器、运动传感器以及其他传感器。可选地,光传感器包括环境光传感器及接近传感器,可选地,环境光传感器可根据环境光线的明暗来调节显示面板1061的亮度,接近传感器可在移动终端100移动到耳边时,关闭显示面板1061和/或背光。作为运动传感器的一种,加速计传感器可检测各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小,静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向,可用于识别手机姿态的应用(比如横竖屏切换、相关游戏、磁力计姿态校准)、振动识别相关功能(比如计步器、敲击)等;至于手机还可配置的指纹传感器、压力传感器、虹膜传感器、分子传感器、陀螺仪、气压计、湿度计、温度计、红外线传感器等其他传感器,在此不再赘述。The mobile terminal 100 also includes at least one sensor 105, such as a light sensor, a motion sensor, and other sensors. Optionally, the light sensor includes an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor. Optionally, the ambient light sensor can adjust the brightness of the display panel 1061 according to the brightness of the ambient light, and the proximity sensor can turn off the display panel 1061 and/or the backlight when the mobile terminal 100 is moved to the ear. As a type of motion sensor, the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in all directions (generally three axes), and can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity when stationary. It can be used for applications that identify the posture of the mobile phone (such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, related games, magnetometer posture calibration), vibration recognition related functions (such as pedometer, tapping), etc.; as for other sensors that can also be configured on the mobile phone, such as fingerprint sensors, pressure sensors, iris sensors, molecular sensors, gyroscopes, barometers, hygrometers, thermometers, infrared sensors, etc., they will not be repeated here.
显示单元106用于显示由用户输入的信息或提供给用户的信息。显示单元106可包括显示面板1061,可以采用液晶显示器(Liquid Crystal Display,LCD)、有机发光二极管(Organic Light-Emitting Diode,OLED)等形式来配置显示面板1061。The display unit 106 is used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user. The display unit 106 may include a display panel 1061, which may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), or the like.
用户输入单元107可用于接收输入的数字或字符信息,以及产生与移动终端的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。可选地,用户输入单元107可包括触控面板1071以及其他输入设备1072。触控面板1071,也称为触摸屏,可收集用户在其上或附近的触摸操作(比如用户使用手指、触笔等任何适合的物体或附件在触控面板1071上或在触控面板1071附近的操作),并根据预先设定的程式驱动相应的连接装置。触控面板1071可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。可选地,触摸检测装置检测用户的触摸方位,并检测触摸操作带来的信号,将信号传送给触摸控制器;触摸控制器从触摸检测装置上接收触摸信息,并将它转换成触点坐标,再送给处理器110,并能接收处理器110发来的命令并加以执行。此外,可以采用电阻式、电容式、红外线以及表面声波等多种类型实现触控面板1071。除了触控面板1071,用户输入单元107还可以包括其他输入设备1072。可选地,其他输入设备1072可以包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆等中的一种或多种,具体此处不做限定。The user input unit 107 can be used to receive input digital or character information, and to generate key signal input related to the user settings and function control of the mobile terminal. Optionally, the user input unit 107 may include a touch panel 1071 and other input devices 1072. The touch panel 1071, also known as a touch screen, can collect the user's touch operation on or near it (such as the user's operation on the touch panel 1071 or near the touch panel 1071 using any suitable object or accessory such as a finger, stylus, etc.), and drive the corresponding connection device according to a pre-set program. The touch panel 1071 may include two parts: a touch detection device and a touch controller. Optionally, the touch detection device detects the user's touch orientation, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device, converts it into the touch point coordinates, and then sends it to the processor 110, and can receive and execute the command sent by the processor 110. In addition, the touch panel 1071 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave. In addition to the touch panel 1071, the user input unit 107 may further include other input devices 1072. Optionally, the other input devices 1072 may include, but are not limited to, one or more of a physical keyboard, a function key (such as a volume control key, a switch key, etc.), a trackball, a mouse, a joystick, etc., which are not specifically limited here.
可选地,触控面板1071可覆盖显示面板1061,当触控面板1071检测到在其上或附近的触摸操作后,传送给处理器110以确定触摸事件的类型,随后处理器110根据触摸事件的类型在显示面板1061上提供相应的视觉输出。虽然在图1中,触控面板1071与显示面板1061是作为两个独立的部件来实现移动终端的输入和输出功能,但是在某些实施例中,可以将触控面板1071与显示面板1061集成而实现移动终端的输入和输出功能,具体此处不做限定。Optionally, the touch panel 1071 may cover the display panel 1061. When the touch panel 1071 detects a touch operation on or near it, it is transmitted to the processor 110 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 110 provides a corresponding visual output on the display panel 1061 according to the type of the touch event. Although in FIG. 1 , the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 are used as two independent components to implement the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, in some embodiments, the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 can be integrated to implement the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, which is not limited here.
接口单元108用作至少一个外部装置与移动终端100连接可以通过的接口。例如,外部装置可以包括有线或无线头戴式耳机端口、外部电源(或电池充电器)端口、有线或无线数据端口、存储卡端口、用于连接具有识别模块的装置的端口、音频输入/输出(I/O)端口、视频I/O端口、耳机端口等等。接口单元108可以用于接收来自外部装置的输入(例如,数据信息、电力等等)并且将接收到的输入传输到移动终端100内的一个或多个元件或者可以用于在移动终端100和外部装置之间传输数据。The interface unit 108 serves as an interface through which at least one external device can be connected to the mobile terminal 100. For example, the external device may include a wired or wireless headset port, an external power supply (or battery charger) port, a wired or wireless data port, a memory card port, a port for connecting a device with an identification module, an audio input/output (I/O) port, a video I/O port, a headphone port, etc. The interface unit 108 may be used to receive input (e.g., data information, power, etc.) from an external device and transmit the received input to one or more elements within the mobile terminal 100 or may be used to transmit data between the mobile terminal 100 and an external device.
存储器109可用于存储软件程序以及各种数据。存储器109可主要包括存储程序区和存储数据区,可选地,存储程序区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等;存储数据区可存储根据手机的使用所创建的数据(比如音频数据、电话本等)等。此外,存储器109可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他易失性固态存储器件。The memory 109 can be used to store software programs and various data. The memory 109 can mainly include a program storage area and a data storage area. Optionally, the program storage area can store an operating system, an application required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), etc.; the data storage area can store data created according to the use of the mobile phone (such as audio data, a phone book, etc.), etc. In addition, the memory 109 can include a high-speed random access memory, and can also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, a flash memory device, or other volatile solid-state storage devices.
处理器110是移动终端的控制中心,利用各种接口和线路连接整个移动终端的各个部分,通过运行或执行存储在存储器109内的软件程序和/或模块,以及调用存储在存储器109内的数据,执行移动终端的各种功能和处理数据,从而对移动终端进行整体监控。处理器110可包括一个或多个处理单元;优选的,处理器110可集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器,可选地,应用处理器主要处理操作系统、用户界面和应用程序等,调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信。可以理解的是,上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器110中。The processor 110 is the control center of the mobile terminal. It uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile terminal. It executes various functions of the mobile terminal and processes data by running or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 109, and calling data stored in the memory 109, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole. The processor 110 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 110 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor. Optionally, the application processor mainly processes the operating system, user interface, and application programs, and the modem processor mainly processes wireless communications. It is understandable that the above-mentioned modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 110.
移动终端100还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源111(比如电池),优选的,电源111可以通过电源管理系统与处理器110逻辑相连,从而通过电源管理系统实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。The mobile terminal 100 may also include a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components. Preferably, the power supply 111 may be logically connected to the processor 110 via a power management system, thereby implementing functions such as managing charging, discharging, and power consumption management through the power management system.
尽管图1未示出,移动终端100还可以包括蓝牙模块等,在此不再赘述。Although not shown in FIG. 1 , the mobile terminal 100 may further include a Bluetooth module, etc., which will not be described in detail herein.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,下面对本申请的移动终端所基于的通信网络系统进行描述。In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the communication network system on which the mobile terminal of the present application is based is described below.
请参阅图2,图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络系统架构图,该通信网络系统为通用移动通信技术的NR(New Radio,新空口)系统,该NR系统包括依次通讯连接的UE(User Equipment,用户设备)201,E-UTRAN(Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network,演进式UMTS陆地无线接入网)202,EPC(Evolved Packet Core,演进式分组核心网)203和运营商的IP业务204。Please refer to Figure 2, which is a communication network system architecture diagram provided in an embodiment of the present application. The communication network system is a NR (New Radio) system of universal mobile communication technology. The NR system includes UE (User Equipment) 201, E-UTRAN (Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network) 202, EPC (Evolved Packet Core) 203 and the operator's IP service 204, which are connected in sequence.
可选地,UE201可以是上述终端设备100,此处不再赘述。Optionally, UE201 may be the above-mentioned terminal device 100, which will not be described in detail here.
E-UTRAN202包括eNodeB2021和其它eNodeB2022等。可选地,eNodeB2021可以通过回程(backhaul)(例如X2接口)与其它eNodeB2022连接,eNodeB2021连接到EPC203,eNodeB2021可以提供UE201到EPC203的接入。 E-UTRAN 202 includes eNodeB 2021 and other eNodeBs 2022 , etc. Optionally, eNodeB 2021 may be connected to other eNodeBs 2022 via a backhaul (eg, an X2 interface), and eNodeB 2021 is connected to EPC 203 , and eNodeB 2021 may provide UE 201 with access to EPC 203 .
EPC203可以包括MME(Mobility Management Entity,移动性管理实体)2031,HSS(Home Subscriber Server,归属用户服务器)2032,其它MME2033,SGW(Serving Gate Way,服务网关)2034,PGW(PDN Gate Way,分组数据网络网关)2035和PCRF(Policy and Charging Rules Function,政策和资费功能实体)2036等。可选地,MME2031是处理UE201和EPC203之间信令的控制节点,提供承载和连接管理。HSS2032用于提供一些寄存器来管理诸如归属位置寄存器(图中未示)之类的功能,并且保存有一些有关服务特征、数据速率等用户专用的信息。所有用户数据都可以通过SGW2034进行发送,PGW2035可以提供UE 201的IP地址分配以及其它功能,PCRF2036是业务数据流和IP承载资源的策略与计费控制策略决策点,它为策略与计费执行功能单元(图中未示)选择及提供可用的策略和计费控制决策。EPC203 may include MME (Mobility Management Entity) 2031, HSS (Home Subscriber Server) 2032, other MMEs 2033, SGW (Serving Gate Way) 2034, PGW (PDN Gate Way) 2035 and PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function) 2036. Optionally, MME 2031 is a control node that processes signaling between UE 201 and EPC 203, providing bearer and connection management. HSS 2032 is used to provide some registers to manage functions such as home location register (not shown in the figure), and save some user-specific information such as service features and data rates. All user data can be sent through SGW2034. PGW2035 can provide IP address allocation and other functions for UE 201. PCRF2036 is the policy and charging control policy decision point for service data flow and IP bearer resources. It selects and provides available policy and charging control decisions for the policy and charging execution functional unit (not shown in the figure).
IP业务204可以包括因特网、内联网、IMS(IP Multimedia Subsystem,IP多媒体子系统)或其它IP业务等。 IP service 204 may include the Internet, intranet, IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem) or other IP services.
虽然上述以LTE系统为例进行了介绍,但本领域技术人员应当知晓,本申请不仅仅适用于LTE系统,也可以适用于其他无线通信系统,例如GSM、CDMA2000、WCDMA、TD-SCDMA、5G以及未来新的网络系统(如6G)等,此处不做限定。Although the above introduction takes the LTE system as an example, those skilled in the art should know that the present application is not only applicable to the LTE system, but also to other wireless communication systems, such as GSM, CDMA2000, WCDMA, TD-SCDMA, 5G and future new network systems (such as 6G), etc., without limitation here.
图3为本申请提供的一种控制器140的硬件结构示意图。该控制器140包括:存储器1401和处理器1402,存储器1401用于存储程序指令,处理器1402用于调用存储器1401中的程序指令执行上述方法实施例一中控制器所执行的步骤,其实现原理以及有益效果类似,此处不再进行赘述。Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a controller 140 provided in the present application. The controller 140 includes: a memory 1401 and a processor 1402, the memory 1401 is used to store program instructions, and the processor 1402 is used to call the program instructions in the memory 1401 to execute the steps performed by the controller in the first embodiment of the above method, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,上述控制器还包括通信接口1403,该通信接口1403可以通过总线1404与处理器1402连接。处理器1402可以控制通信接口1403来实现控制器140的接收和发送的功能。Optionally, the controller further includes a communication interface 1403, which can be connected to the processor 1402 via a bus 1404. The processor 1402 can control the communication interface 1403 to implement the receiving and sending functions of the controller 140.
图4为本申请提供的一种网络节点150的硬件结构示意图。该网络节点150包括:存储器1501和处理器1502,存储器1501用于存储程序指令,处理器1502用于调用存储器1501中的程序指令执行上述方法实施例一中首节点所执行的步骤,其实现原理以及有益效果类似,此处不再进行赘述。Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a network node 150 provided by the present application. The network node 150 includes: a memory 1501 and a processor 1502, the memory 1501 is used to store program instructions, and the processor 1502 is used to call the program instructions in the memory 1501 to execute the steps performed by the first node in the first embodiment of the above method, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,上述控制器还包括通信接口1503,该通信接口1503可以通过总线1504与处理器1502连接。处理器1502可以控制通信接口1503来实现网络节点150的接收和发送的功能。Optionally, the controller further includes a communication interface 1503, which can be connected to the processor 1502 via a bus 1504. The processor 1502 can control the communication interface 1503 to implement the receiving and sending functions of the network node 150.
上述以软件功能模块的形式实现的集成的模块,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。上述软件功能模块存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器(英文:processor)执行本申请各个实施例方法的部分步骤。The above-mentioned integrated module implemented in the form of a software function module can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. The above-mentioned software function module is stored in a storage medium, including a number of instructions for enabling a computer device (which can be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor (English: processor) to perform some steps of the methods of various embodiments of the present application.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。计算机指令可以存储在存储介质中,或者从一个存储介质向另一个存储介质传输,例如,计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘solid state disk,SSD)等。In the above embodiments, it can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the process or function according to the embodiment of the present application is generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a storage medium, or transmitted from one storage medium to another storage medium. For example, the computer instructions can be transmitted from one website site, computer, server or data center to another website site, computer, server or data center by wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by the computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center that includes one or more available media integrated. The available medium can be a magnetic medium (e.g., a floppy disk, a hard disk, a tape), an optical medium (e.g., a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (e.g., a solid state drive solid state disk, SSD), etc.
基于上述移动终端硬件结构以及通信网络系统,提出本申请各个实施例。Based on the above-mentioned mobile terminal hardware structure and communication network system, various embodiments of the present application are proposed.
第一实施例First embodiment
参照图5,图5为根据第一实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图,本申请实施例的所述方法可应用于终端设备(如手机),所述控制方法包括以下步骤:5 is a schematic flow chart of a control method according to a first embodiment. The method of the embodiment of the present application can be applied to a terminal device (such as a mobile phone). The control method includes the following steps:
S1:基于下行信息调整上行定时。S1: Adjust uplink timing based on downlink information.
在本申请实施例中,针对基于多个网络设备场景,例如:多个传输接收节点(Multi-TRP,Multi-Transmission/Reception Point)场景,可选地,该多个网络设备场景是基于多个下行控制信息(DCI,Downlink Control Information)的多个网络设备场景,例如:基于多个下行控制信息的多个传输接收点场景,在该场景下,无线资源控制(RRC,Radio Resource Control)在控制资源集信息元素(IE,Information Element)(例如:ControlResourceSet)中配置的控制资源集池索引值参数(例 如:coresetPoolIndex)有两个取值,这两个值是0和1,当控制资源集池索引值参数为0和1时,分别对应两组控制资源集(CORESET,Control Resource Set),例如:第一组控制资源集,其中每个控制资源集的控制资源集池索引值参数为0;第二组控制资源集,其中每个控制资源集的控制资源集池索引值参数为1。在基于多个下行控制信息的多个网络设备场景,终端设备可以在两组控制资源集对应的资源上接收/监测两个物理下行控制信道(PDCCH,Physical Downlink Control Channel),例如:网络设备包括第一网络设备和第二网络设备,第一网络设备关联于控制资源集池索引值参数值0,可选地,终端设备在控制资源集池索引值参数为0的第一组控制资源集对应的资源上接收/监测从第一网络设备发送的第一物理下行控制信道,从第一网络设备接收由该第一物理下行控制信道调度的物理下行共享信道或下行参考信号,和/或向第一网络设备发送由该第一物理下行控制信道调度的物理上行共享信道或物理上行控制信道或上行参考信号;第二网络设备关联于控制资源集池索引值参数值1,可选地,终端设备在控制资源集池索引值参数为1的第二组控制资源集对应的资源上接收/监测从第二网络设备发送的第二物理下行控制信道,从第二网络设备接收由该第二物理下行控制信道调度的物理下行共享信道或下行参考信号,和/或向第二网络设备发送由该第二物理下行控制信道调度的物理上行共享信道或物理上行控制信道或上行参考信号。In an embodiment of the present application, for a scenario based on multiple network devices, for example: a scenario with multiple transmission receiving nodes (Multi-TRP, Multi-Transmission/Reception Point), optionally, the multiple network device scenarios are multiple network device scenarios based on multiple downlink control information (DCI, Downlink Control Information), for example: a scenario with multiple transmission receiving points based on multiple downlink control information. In this scenario, the control resource set pool index value parameter (for example: coresetPoolIndex) configured by the wireless resource control (RRC, Radio Resource Control) in the control resource set information element (IE, Information Element) (for example: ControlResourceSet) has two values, which are 0 and 1. When the control resource set pool index value parameter is 0 and 1, it corresponds to two groups of control resource sets (CORESET, Control Resource Set), for example: a first group of control resource sets, wherein the control resource set pool index value parameter of each control resource set is 0; a second group of control resource sets, wherein the control resource set pool index value parameter of each control resource set is 1. In a scenario of multiple network devices based on multiple downlink control information, a terminal device can receive/monitor two physical downlink control channels (PDCCH, Physical Downlink Control Channel) on resources corresponding to two groups of control resource sets. For example, the network device includes a first network device and a second network device, and the first network device is associated with a control resource set pool index value parameter value 0. Optionally, the terminal device receives/monitors a first physical downlink control channel sent from the first network device on resources corresponding to the first group of control resource sets with a control resource set pool index value parameter of 0, and receives a physical downlink shared information scheduled by the first physical downlink control channel from the first network device. The terminal device receives/monitors a second physical downlink control channel sent from the second network device on resources corresponding to a second group of control resource sets whose index value parameter is 1, receives a physical downlink shared channel or a downlink reference signal scheduled by the second physical downlink control channel from the second network device, and/or sends a physical uplink shared channel or a physical uplink control channel or an uplink reference signal scheduled by the second physical downlink control channel to the first network device; the second network device is associated with the control resource pool index value parameter 1, and optionally, the terminal device receives/monitors a second physical downlink control channel sent from the second network device on resources corresponding to a second group of control resource sets whose index value parameter is 1, receives a physical downlink shared channel or a downlink reference signal scheduled by the second physical downlink control channel from the second network device, and/or sends a physical uplink shared channel or a physical uplink control channel or an uplink reference signal scheduled by the second physical downlink control channel to the second network device.
可选地,本申请实施例中第一网络设备和第二网络设备可以属于同一个小区,也可以属于不同小区。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the first network device and the second network device may belong to the same cell or to different cells.
可选地,下行信息包括无线资源控制信令、系统信息、下行控制信息及同步广播块中的至少一项;Optionally, the downlink information includes at least one of radio resource control signaling, system information, downlink control information and a synchronization broadcast block;
可选地,无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息包括突发中同步广播块位置参数、每个元素的同步广播块个数参数、元素的排列图样参数、在一个组参数、组状态参数、短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项,可选地,系统信息是系统信息块1(SIB1,System Information Block 1);Optionally, the radio resource control signaling and/or the system information includes at least one of a synchronization broadcast block position parameter in a burst, a synchronization broadcast block number parameter for each element, an element arrangement pattern parameter, a group parameter, a group status parameter, a short bitmap parameter, a medium bitmap parameter, and a long bitmap parameter, and optionally, the system information is a system information block 1 (SIB1, System Information Block 1);
可选地,下行控制信息包括第一下行控制信息和/或第二下行控制信息。Optionally, the downlink control information includes first downlink control information and/or second downlink control information.
可选地,终端设备可能处于单网络设备或者多个网络设备场景下,终端设备可通过隐式方式或显式方式判断出何时对同步广播块(SSB,Synchronization Signal and PBCH block)进行分组,即:将不同SSB关联到不同的网络设备。根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样对所有的候选SSB进行分组,分为两组候选SSB,每组候选SSB关联于一个网络设备。Optionally, the terminal device may be in a single network device or multiple network device scenario, and the terminal device may implicitly or explicitly determine when to group the synchronization broadcast block (SSB, Synchronization Signal and PBCH block), that is, to associate different SSBs with different network devices. All candidate SSBs are grouped according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divided into two groups of candidate SSBs, each group of candidate SSBs is associated with one network device.
可选地,根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样,对服务小区公共配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素中突发中SSB位置参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst,又称为突发中同步广播块位置参数)指示的用于传输的SSB进行分组,分为两组用于传输的SSB,每组从一个网络设备发送。Optionally, according to the number of SSBs in each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst (for example: ssb-PositionsInBurst, also known as the synchronous broadcast block position parameter in the burst) in the service cell common configuration information element and/or the service cell common system information block configuration information element are grouped and divided into two groups of SSBs for transmission, each group being sent from one network device.
可选地,终端设备通过两个参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst和ssb-PositionsInBurst2)或两组参数(例如:两组inOneGroup和groupPresence,或者两组shortBitmap、mediumBitmap和longBitmap)可以直接得到第一和第二网络设备的用于传输的SSB。Optionally, the terminal device can directly obtain the SSB for transmission of the first and second network devices through two parameters (for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2) or two groups of parameters (for example, two groups of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two groups of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap and longBitmap).
可选地,终端设备测量从第一网络设备发送的SSB,并从中找到最佳的SSB,用于后续随机接入信道(RACH,Random Access Channel)流程;和/或,终端设备测量从第二网络设备发送的SSB,并从中找到最佳的SSB,用于后续RACH流程。Optionally, the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the first network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for a subsequent random access channel (RACH) process; and/or, the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the second network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for a subsequent RACH process.
可选地,在随机接入响应窗口中接收对应所述随机接入前导的随机接入响应,进而根据随机接入响应中的定时提前命令对物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整。Optionally, a random access response corresponding to the random access preamble is received in a random access response window, and then timing adjustment is performed on a physical uplink channel and/or a reference signal according to a timing advance command in the random access response.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过基于下行信息调整上行定时,在多个网络设备场景中,使随机接入过程能够基于特定一个网络设备进行,从而提高定时调整的准确性。This embodiment uses the above solution, specifically by adjusting the uplink timing based on the downlink information, so that in a scenario of multiple network devices, the random access process can be performed based on a specific network device, thereby improving the accuracy of the timing adjustment.
第二实施例Second embodiment
在本申请第一实施例的基础上,本实施例公开了步骤S1基于下行信息调整上行定时的具体方法。参照图6,图6为根据第二实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图,示出了S1的具体步骤包括:Based on the first embodiment of the present application, this embodiment discloses a specific method of adjusting the uplink timing based on downlink information in step S1. Referring to FIG. 6 , FIG. 6 is a flow chart of a control method according to the second embodiment, showing that the specific steps of S1 include:
S11:基于下行信息选取或确定物理随机接入信道时机;S11: Selecting or determining a physical random access channel timing based on downlink information;
可选地,根据下行信息中的无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息将SSB分为两组,第一组SSB从第一网络设备发送,第二组SSB从第二网络设备发送。从第一组SSB中选择最佳SSB,并基于该SSB向第一网络设备发送随机接入前导(例如:Preamble);和/或,从第二组SSB中选择最佳SSB,并基于该SSB向第二网络设备发送随机接入前导。Optionally, the SSBs are divided into two groups according to the radio resource control signaling and/or system information in the downlink information, the first group of SSBs are sent from the first network device, and the second group of SSBs are sent from the second network device. The best SSB is selected from the first group of SSBs, and a random access preamble (e.g., Preamble) is sent to the first network device based on the SSB; and/or, the best SSB is selected from the second group of SSBs, and a random access preamble is sent to the second network device based on the SSB.
S12:在物理随机接入信道时机发送随机接入前导;S12: Send a random access preamble on a physical random access channel;
可选地,终端设备根据第一SSB确定第一物理随机接入信道时机(PRACH occasion,Physical Random Access Channel occasion),和/或,根据第二SSB确定第二PRACH occasion。可选地,根据终端设备是否支持同时向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导,有以下两种情形:Optionally, the terminal device determines a first physical random access channel occasion (PRACH occasion) according to the first SSB, and/or determines a second PRACH occasion according to the second SSB. Optionally, depending on whether the terminal device supports sending random access preambles to two network devices simultaneously, there are the following two situations:
(1)支持:无论第一PRACH occasion和第二PRACH occasion在时域上是否相同,终端设备可以直接在第一PRACH occasion向第一网络设备发送随机接入前导,终端设备可以直接在第二PRACH occasion向第二网络设备发送随机接入前导。(1) Support: Regardless of whether the first PRACH occasion and the second PRACH occasion are the same in the time domain, the terminal device can directly send a random access preamble to the first network device in the first PRACH occasion, and the terminal device can directly send a random access preamble to the second network device in the second PRACH occasion.
(2)不支持:通过以下方法,终端设备在时域上不相同的PRACH occasion向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导:(2) Not supported: The terminal device sends random access preambles to two network devices at different PRACH occasions in the time domain through the following methods:
在第一个随机接入响应窗口截止前不进行第二个随机接入过程:终端设备先向其中一个网络设备发送随机接入前 导,终端设备在随机接入响应窗口截止后向另一个网络设备发送随机接入前导。The second random access process is not performed before the first random access response window expires: the terminal device first sends a random access preamble to one of the network devices, and the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the other network device after the random access response window expires.
在SSB对应的后续可用的PRACH occasion发送随机接入前导:如果第一PRACH occasion和第二PRACH occasion在时域上相同,终端设备先向一个网络设备发送随机接入前导,根据另一个网络设备对应的最佳SSB得到其关联的后续可用的PRACH occasion,终端设备从中选择一个PRACH occasion向该网络设备发送随机接入前导。Send a random access preamble in the subsequent available PRACH occasion corresponding to the SSB: If the first PRACH occasion and the second PRACH occasion are the same in the time domain, the terminal device first sends a random access preamble to one network device, and obtains the subsequent available PRACH occasion associated with the other network device according to the best SSB corresponding to the other network device. The terminal device selects a PRACH occasion from them to send a random access preamble to the network device.
对SSB与PRACH occasion的关联方法设计约束关系:基于约束关系及第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于约束关系及第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机。A constraint relationship is designed for the association method between SSB and PRACH occasion: a first physical random access channel opportunity is obtained based on the constraint relationship and the first synchronous broadcast block, and/or a second physical random access channel opportunity is obtained based on the constraint relationship and the second synchronous broadcast block.
S13:接收随机接入响应,并根据定时提前命令对物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整,具体包括以下至少一项:S13: receiving a random access response, and adjusting the timing of a physical uplink channel and/or a reference signal according to the timing advance command, specifically including at least one of the following:
根据第一定时提前命令对第一物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整;Performing timing adjustment on the first physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal according to the first timing advance command;
根据第二定时提前命令对第二物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整。The timing of the second physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal is adjusted according to the second timing advance command.
可选地,接收到包含定时提前命令的随机接入响应后,根据定时提前命令对物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整,可选地,上行定时调整包括基于非竞争的随机接入的上行定时调整和/或基于竞争的随机接入的上行定时调整;物理上行信道包括物理上行共享信道(PUSCH,Physical Uplink Shared Channel)和/或物理上行控制信道(PUCCH,Physical Uplink Control Channel),参考信号包括信道探测参考信号(SRS,Sounding Reference Signal)。Optionally, after receiving a random access response including a timing advance command, a timing adjustment is performed on the physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal according to the timing advance command. Optionally, the uplink timing adjustment includes an uplink timing adjustment based on non-competition random access and/or an uplink timing adjustment based on competition random access. The physical uplink channel includes a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH, Physical Uplink Shared Channel) and/or a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH, Physical Uplink Control Channel), and the reference signal includes a channel sounding reference signal (SRS, Sounding Reference Signal).
可选地,基于非竞争的随机接入的上行定时调整,主要包括以下步骤:Optionally, the uplink timing adjustment based on non-contention random access mainly includes the following steps:
第一步:从第一网络设备发送下行控制信息,可选地,包括第一随机接入前导索引值、第一SSB索引值以及第一物理随机接入信道(PRACH,Physical Random Access Channel)掩码索引值,可选地,第一随机接入前导索引值不全为0;和/或,从第二网络设备发送下行控制信息,可选地,包括第二随机接入前导索引值、第二SSB索引值以及第二物理随机接入信道掩码索引值,可选地,第二随机接入前导索引值不全为0。The first step: sending downlink control information from a first network device, optionally including a first random access preamble index value, a first SSB index value and a first physical random access channel (PRACH, Physical Random Access Channel) mask index value, optionally, the first random access preamble index value is not all zero; and/or, sending downlink control information from a second network device, optionally including a second random access preamble index value, a second SSB index value and a second physical random access channel mask index value, optionally, the second random access preamble index value is not all zero.
第二步:终端设备根据第一SSB索引值和第一物理随机接入信道掩码索引值确定第一PRACH occasion,并在第一PRACH occasion向第一网络设备发送第一随机接入前导;和/或,终端设备根据第二SSB索引值和第二物理随机接入信道掩码索引值确定第二PRACH occasion,并在第二PRACH occasion向第二网络设备发送第二随机接入前导。Step 2: The terminal device determines the first PRACH occasion according to the first SSB index value and the first physical random access channel mask index value, and sends the first random access preamble to the first network device at the first PRACH occasion; and/or, the terminal device determines the second PRACH occasion according to the second SSB index value and the second physical random access channel mask index value, and sends the second random access preamble to the second network device at the second PRACH occasion.
第三步:从第一网络设备发送对应第一随机接入前导的随机接入响应,和/或从第二网络设备发送对应第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应。Step 3: Send a random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble from the first network device, and/or send a random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble from the second network device.
第四步:对第一物理上行信道/参考信号使用第一定时提前命令进行定时调整,和/或对第二物理上行信道/参考信号使用第二定时提前命令进行定时调整。Step 4: Use the first timing advance command to perform timing adjustment on the first physical uplink channel/reference signal, and/or use the second timing advance command to perform timing adjustment on the second physical uplink channel/reference signal.
可选地,基于竞争的随机接入的上行定时调整,主要包括以下步骤:Optionally, the uplink timing adjustment of the contention-based random access mainly includes the following steps:
第一步:基于竞争的随机接入包含终端设备发起的基于竞争的随机接入和网络设备发起的基于竞争的随机接入。可选地,终端设备发起的基于竞争的随机接入包括类型1随机接入和类型2随机接入。网络设备发起的基于竞争的随机接入是通过发送下行控制信息指示终端设备进行随机接入,即:从第一网络设备发送下行控制信息,可选地,包括第一随机接入前导索引值,可选地,第一随机接入前导索引值全为0;和/或,从第二网络设备发送下行控制信息,可选地,包括第二随机接入前导索引值,,可选地,第二随机接入前导索引值全为0。终端设备从第一组SSB中选出第一SSB和/或第二组SSB中选出第二SSB。Step 1: Contention-based random access includes contention-based random access initiated by a terminal device and contention-based random access initiated by a network device. Optionally, the contention-based random access initiated by a terminal device includes type 1 random access and type 2 random access. Contention-based random access initiated by a network device is to instruct a terminal device to perform random access by sending downlink control information, that is: downlink control information is sent from a first network device, optionally including a first random access preamble index value, optionally, the first random access preamble index value is all 0; and/or downlink control information is sent from a second network device, optionally including a second random access preamble index value, optionally, the second random access preamble index value is all 0. The terminal device selects a first SSB from the first group of SSBs and/or selects a second SSB from the second group of SSBs.
第二步:终端设备根据第一SSB确定第一PRACH occasion,和/或根据第二SSB确定第二PRACH occasion。Step 2: The terminal device determines the first PRACH occasion based on the first SSB, and/or determines the second PRACH occasion based on the second SSB.
第三步:终端设备在第一PRACH occasion向第一网络设备发送第一随机接入前导,和/或在第二PRACH occasion向第二网络设备发送第二随机接入前导。Step 3: The terminal device sends a first random access preamble to the first network device at the first PRACH occasion, and/or sends a second random access preamble to the second network device at the second PRACH occasion.
第四步:从第一网络设备发送对应第一随机接入前导的随机接入响应,和/或从第二网络设备发送对应第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应。可选地,对于类型2随机接入,从第一网络设备发送对应第一随机接入前导的绝对定时提前命令介质访问控制层控制单元(MAC CE,Media Access Control Control Element)(例如:absolute timing advance command MAC CE),和/或从第二网络设备发送对应第二随机接入前导的绝对定时提前命令MAC CE。Step 4: Send a random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble from the first network device, and/or send a random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble from the second network device. Optionally, for type 2 random access, an absolute timing advance command media access control layer control element (MAC CE) (e.g., absolute timing advance command MAC CE) corresponding to the first random access preamble is sent from the first network device, and/or an absolute timing advance command MAC CE corresponding to the second random access preamble is sent from the second network device.
第五步:对第一物理上行信道/参考信号使用第一定时提前命令进行定时调整,和/或对第二物理上行信道/参考信号使用第二定时提前命令进行定时调整。Step 5: Use the first timing advance command to perform timing adjustment on the first physical uplink channel/reference signal, and/or use the second timing advance command to perform timing adjustment on the second physical uplink channel/reference signal.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过基于下行信息选取或确定物理随机接入信道时机;在物理随机接入信道时机发送随机接入前导;接收随机接入响应,并根据定时提前命令对物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整。在多个网络设备场景中基于特定一个网络设备配置SSB,提高定时调整的准确性。This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by selecting or determining the physical random access channel opportunity based on downlink information; sending a random access preamble at the physical random access channel opportunity; receiving a random access response, and adjusting the timing of the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal according to the timing advance command. In a scenario of multiple network devices, SSB is configured based on a specific network device to improve the accuracy of timing adjustment.
第三实施例Third embodiment
在本申请第一实施例及第二实施例的基础上,本实施例公开了步骤S11基于下行信息选取或确定物理随机接入信道时机的具体方法。参照图7,图7为根据第三实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图,示出了步骤S11的具体步骤包括:Based on the first and second embodiments of the present application, this embodiment discloses a specific method for selecting or determining a physical random access channel opportunity based on downlink information in step S11. Referring to FIG. 7 , FIG. 7 is a flow chart of a control method according to a third embodiment, showing that the specific steps of step S11 include:
S111:基于无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息选取或确定第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块;S111: Select or determine a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on radio resource control signaling and/or system information;
可选地,在基于无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息选取或确定第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块的步骤之前,还包括以下至少一项:Optionally, before the step of selecting or determining the first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on the radio resource control signaling and/or the system information, at least one of the following is further included:
根据突发中同步广播块位置参数选取或确定用于传输的同步广播块;Selecting or determining a sync broadcast block for transmission according to a sync broadcast block position parameter in a burst;
在服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共配置信息元素中增加第二突发中同步广播块位置参数;Adding a synchronization broadcast block position parameter in the second burst to a serving cell common system information block configuration information element and/or a serving cell common configuration information element;
在突发中同步广播块位置参数中增加第二组在一个组参数和组状态参数,和/或第二组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项。A second group of in-group parameters and group status parameters, and/or at least one of a second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters are added to the synchronous broadcast block position parameters in the burst.
可选地,对候选SSB分组过程中,终端设备可能处于单网络设备或者多个网络设备场景下,终端设备需要判断出何时对同步广播块进行分组,即:将不同SSB关联到不同的网络设备,可以为以下方式:Optionally, during the grouping of candidate SSBs, the terminal device may be in a single network device or multiple network device scenario. The terminal device needs to determine when to group the synchronous broadcast blocks, that is, to associate different SSBs with different network devices, which can be done in the following ways:
隐式方式:终端设备根据应用场景判断,例如:当前是基于多个DCI的多个网络设备场景,即:RRC在控制资源集信息元素中配置的控制资源集池索引值参数有两个取值,这两个值是0和1,终端设备可以认为SSB需要分组;Implicit method: The terminal device judges according to the application scenario. For example, the current scenario is based on multiple network devices with multiple DCIs. That is, the control resource set pool index value parameter configured by RRC in the control resource set information element has two values, 0 and 1. The terminal device can consider that SSB needs to be grouped.
显式方式:通过服务小区公共配置信息元素(例如:ServingCellConfigCommon)和/或服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素(例如:ServingCellConfigCommonSIB)中参数指示SSB需要分组。可选地,可以通过以下三种方式指示:Explicit method: Indicate that SSB needs to be grouped through parameters in the serving cell common configuration information element (e.g., ServingCellConfigCommon) and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element (e.g., ServingCellConfigCommonSIB). Optionally, it can be indicated in the following three ways:
(1)在信息元素中增加参数用于指示SSB是否需要分组,如果该参数使能则表示SSB需要进行分组;(1) Add a parameter in the information element to indicate whether the SSB needs to be grouped. If the parameter is enabled, it means that the SSB needs to be grouped;
(2)如果信息元素中新增参数用于指示元素的排列图样,该参数的配置,则认为SSB需要进行分组;(2) If a new parameter is added to the information element to indicate the arrangement pattern of the element, the configuration of this parameter means that the SSB needs to be grouped;
(3)如果信息元素中新增参数指示第二个网络设备用于传输的SSB,该参数的配置,则认为SSB需要进行分组。(3) If a new parameter is added to the information element to indicate the SSB used by the second network device for transmission, the configuration of this parameter means that the SSB needs to be grouped.
可选地,新增参数是第二突发中同步广播块位置参数,和/或第二组在一个组参数和组状态参数,和/或第二组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项。Optionally, the newly added parameter is a synchronous broadcast block position parameter in the second burst, and/or a group parameter and a group status parameter of the second group, and/or at least one of a short bitmap parameter, a medium bitmap parameter and a long bitmap parameter of the second group.
可选地,第一组SSB中每个元素包含X个SSB,第二组SSB中每个元素包含Y个SSB,第一组SSB关联于第一个网络设备,第二组SSB关联于第二个网络设备,第一组SSB与第二组SSB中的所有元素以一种图样排列,可选地,X与Y为整数,例如:1,2,3,4等。此外,X与Y的数值可以相同,也可以不相同。有以下X与Y数值的确定方法:Optionally, each element in the first group of SSBs contains X SSBs, each element in the second group of SSBs contains Y SSBs, the first group of SSBs is associated with a first network device, the second group of SSBs is associated with a second network device, all elements in the first group of SSBs and the second group of SSBs are arranged in a pattern, and optionally, X and Y are integers, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, etc. In addition, the values of X and Y may be the same or different. The following methods are used to determine the values of X and Y:
默认方式:X与Y数值使用默认数值;Default mode: X and Y values use default values;
网络设备配置:通过服务小区公共配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素中新增两个参数分别指示X与Y数值。特别地,如果X与Y的数值相同,则只需一个参数指示X与Y数值。Network equipment configuration: Two new parameters are added in the serving cell common configuration information element and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element to indicate the values of X and Y. In particular, if the values of X and Y are the same, only one parameter is needed to indicate the values of X and Y.
可选地,第一组SSB与第二组SSB中的所有元素以一种图样(即:pattern)排列,可选地,图样可以是循环排列图样或者半对半排列图样,有以下图样的确定方式:Optionally, all elements in the first group of SSBs and the second group of SSBs are arranged in a pattern. Optionally, the pattern may be a cyclic pattern or a half-and-half pattern. The following pattern determination methods are available:
默认使用循环排列图样;By default, a circular permutation pattern is used;
默认使用半对半排列图样;The default is to use a half-and-half pattern;
网络设备配置:通过服务小区公共配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素中新增参数指示当前所有元素以哪一种图样排列,例如:循环排列图样或者半对半排列图样。Network equipment configuration: New parameters are added to the serving cell common configuration information element and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element to indicate the pattern in which all elements are currently arranged, for example: a circular arrangement pattern or a half-and-half arrangement pattern.
可选地,基于无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息选取或确定第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块的步骤,包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the step of selecting or determining the first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on radio resource control signaling and/or system information includes at least one of the following:
根据第一突发中同步广播块位置参数得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二突发中同步广播块位置参数得到第二组同步广播块;Obtaining a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to synchronized broadcast block position parameters in the first burst, and/or obtaining a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to synchronized broadcast block position parameters in the second burst;
根据每个元素的同步广播块个数参数和/或元素的排列图样参数,对候选同步广播块和/或用于传输的同步广播块进行分组,得到第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块;Grouping candidate synchronized broadcast blocks and/or synchronized broadcast blocks for transmission according to a synchronized broadcast block number parameter of each element and/or an arrangement pattern parameter of the element to obtain a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks;
根据第一组在一个组参数和/或组状态参数得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二组在一个组参数和/或组状态参数得到第二组同步广播块;Obtain a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the first group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters, and/or obtain a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the second group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters;
根据第一组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项得到第二组同步广播块。A first group of synchronized broadcast blocks is obtained according to at least one of the first group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters, and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks is obtained according to at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters.
可选地,将同步广播块(SSB,Synchronization Signal and PBCH block)分为两组有以下方法:Optionally, the Synchronization Signal and PBCH block (SSB) can be divided into two groups as follows:
(1)对候选SSB分组:根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样对所有的候选SSB进行分组,分为两组候选SSB,再结合突发中SSB位置参数可以得到两组用于传输的SSB。(1) Grouping candidate SSBs: All candidate SSBs are grouped according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements into two groups of candidate SSBs. Then, two groups of SSBs for transmission are obtained by combining the SSB position parameters in the burst.
(2)对用于传输的SSB分组:终端设备根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样,对突发中SSB位置参数指示的用于传输的SSB进行分组,分为两组用于传输的SSB。(2) Grouping SSBs for transmission: The terminal device groups the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst according to the number of SSBs in each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divides them into two groups of SSBs for transmission.
(3)直接指示两组用于传输的SSB:通过两个参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst和ssb-PositionsInBurst2)或两组参数(例如:两组inOneGroup和groupPresence,或者两组shortBitmap、mediumBitmap和longBitmap)可以直接得到两组用于传输的SSB。(3) Directly indicating two sets of SSBs for transmission: Two sets of SSBs for transmission can be directly obtained through two parameters (for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2) or two sets of parameters (for example, two sets of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two sets of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap, and longBitmap).
S112:基于第一同步广播块和/或第一下行控制信息选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于第二同步广播块和/或第二下行控制信息选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机。S112: Select or determine a first physical random access channel timing based on the first synchronization broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or select or determine a second physical random access channel timing based on the second synchronization broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information.
可选地,选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机和/或第二物理随机接入信道时机的步骤,包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the step of selecting or determining the first physical random access channel opportunity and/or the second physical random access channel opportunity includes at least one of the following:
根据第一下行控制信息中第一同步广播块索引值和/或第一物理随机接入信道掩码索引值选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或,根据第二下行控制信息中第二同步广播块索引值和/或第二物理随机接入信道掩码索引值选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机;Select or determine a first physical random access channel opportunity according to a first synchronization broadcast block index value and/or a first physical random access channel mask index value in the first downlink control information, and/or select or determine a second physical random access channel opportunity according to a second synchronization broadcast block index value and/or a second physical random access channel mask index value in the second downlink control information;
对同步广播块与物理随机接入信道时机的关联方法设计约束关系,基于约束关系及第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于约束关系及第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机;Designing a constraint relationship for the association method between the synchronous broadcast block and the physical random access channel opportunity, obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the first synchronous broadcast block, and/or obtaining a second physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the second synchronous broadcast block;
若满足第一预设条件,根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或从第二同步广播块对应的后续可用的物理随机接入信道时机中选择一个作为第二物理随机接入信道时机;If the first preset condition is met, obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or selecting one from the subsequently available physical random access channel opportunities corresponding to the second synchronization broadcast block as a second physical random access channel opportunity;
若满足第二预设条件,根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或根据第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机;If the second preset condition is met, obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtaining a second physical random access channel opportunity according to the second synchronization broadcast block;
若满足第三预设条件,将网络设备标识增加到随机接入无线网络临时标识计算公式,得到改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识,并根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或根据第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机,将改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识关联于第一物理随机接入信道时机和/或第二物理随机接入信道时机。If the third preset condition is met, the network device identifier is added to the random access wireless network temporary identifier calculation formula to obtain an improved random access wireless network temporary identifier, and the first physical random access channel timing is obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or the second physical random access channel timing is obtained according to the second synchronization broadcast block, and the improved random access wireless network temporary identifier is associated with the first physical random access channel timing and/or the second physical random access channel timing.
可选地,第一改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识关联于第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或,第二改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识关联于第二物理随机接入信道时机。Optionally, the first improved random access radio network temporary identifier is associated with a first physical random access channel opportunity, and/or the second improved random access radio network temporary identifier is associated with a second physical random access channel opportunity.
可选地,第一预设条件包括:如果根据第一同步广播块和第二同步广播块得到的第一物理随机接入信道时机与第二物理随机接入信道时机在时域上相同,且终端设备不支持同时向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导。Optionally, the first preset condition includes: if the first physical random access channel timing obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block and the second synchronization broadcast block is the same as the second physical random access channel timing in the time domain, and the terminal device does not support sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same time.
可选地,第二预设条件包括:如果根据第一同步广播块和第二同步广播块得到的第一物理随机接入信道时机与第二物理随机接入信道时机在时域上不相同,且终端设备不支持同时向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导。随机接入信道时机(例如:PRACH occasion)在时域上不相同,是指这两个PRACH occasion在时域上至少间隔X个时间单元,可选地,X是整数。Optionally, the second preset condition includes: if the first physical random access channel occasion obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block and the second synchronization broadcast block are different from the second physical random access channel occasion in the time domain, and the terminal device does not support sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same time. The random access channel occasion (for example: PRACH occasion) is different in the time domain, which means that the two PRACH occasions are separated by at least X time units in the time domain, and optionally, X is an integer.
可选地,第三预设条件包括:如果根据第一同步广播块和第二同步广播块得到的第一物理随机接入信道时机与第二物理随机接入信道时机相同,且终端设备支持同时向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导。Optionally, the third preset condition includes: if the first physical random access channel timing obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block and the second synchronization broadcast block is the same as the second physical random access channel timing, and the terminal device supports sending random access preambles to two network devices respectively at the same time.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过基于无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息选取或确定第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块;基于第一同步广播块和/或第一下行控制信息选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于第二同步广播块和/或第二下行控制信息选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机。在多个网络设备场景中基于特定一个网络设备配置SSB,终端设备可以选择两个PRACH occasion向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,并且能区分两个不同的随机接入过程,提高定时调整的准确性。This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by selecting or determining the first group of synchronization broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronization broadcast blocks based on radio resource control signaling and/or system information; selecting or determining the first physical random access channel opportunity based on the first synchronization broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or selecting or determining the second physical random access channel opportunity based on the second synchronization broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information. In a scenario of multiple network devices, based on configuring SSB for a specific network device, the terminal device can select two PRACH occasions to send random access preambles to two network devices, and can distinguish between two different random access processes, thereby improving the accuracy of timing adjustment.
第四实施例Fourth embodiment
参照图8,图8为根据第四实施例示出的控制方法的流程示意图,本申请实施例的所述方法可应用于网络设备(如基站),所述控制方法包括以下步骤:8 is a flow chart of a control method according to a fourth embodiment. The method of the embodiment of the present application can be applied to a network device (such as a base station). The control method includes the following steps:
S0:发送下行信息,以使终端设备基于下行信息调整上行定时。S0: Send downlink information so that the terminal device can adjust the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
可选地,网络设备发送的下行信息包括无线资源控制信令、系统信息、下行控制信息及同步广播块中的至少一项。Optionally, the downlink information sent by the network device includes at least one of radio resource control signaling, system information, downlink control information and a synchronization broadcast block.
可选地,无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息包括突发中同步广播块位置参数、每个元素的同步广播块个数参数、元素的排列图样参数、在一个组参数、组状态参数、短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项。Optionally, the wireless resource control signaling and/or system information includes a synchronization broadcast block position parameter in a burst, a synchronization broadcast block number parameter for each element, an element arrangement pattern parameter, a group parameter, a group status parameter, a short bitmap parameter, a medium bitmap parameter, and at least one of a long bitmap parameter.
可选地,下行控制信息包括第一下行控制信息和/或第二下行控制信息。Optionally, the downlink control information includes first downlink control information and/or second downlink control information.
可选地,接收到网络设备发送的下行信息后,终端设备根据下行信息选取或确定物理随机接入信道时机,在物理随机接入信道时机发送对应的随机接入前导,在随机接入响应窗口中接收对应所述随机接入前导的随机接入响应,根据随机接入响应中的定时提前命令对物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整。Optionally, after receiving the downlink information sent by the network device, the terminal device selects or determines the physical random access channel timing according to the downlink information, sends the corresponding random access preamble at the physical random access channel timing, receives the random access response corresponding to the random access preamble in the random access response window, and adjusts the timing of the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal according to the timing advance command in the random access response.
可选地,终端设备在根据下行信息选取或确定物理随机接入信道时机过程中,基于下行信息中的无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息选取或确定第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块;基于第一同步广播块和/或第一下行控制信息选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于第二同步广播块和/或第二下行控制信息选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机。Optionally, in the process of selecting or determining the physical random access channel timing according to the downlink information, the terminal device selects or determines the first group of synchronous broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronous broadcast blocks based on the wireless resource control signaling and/or system information in the downlink information; selects or determines the first physical random access channel timing based on the first synchronous broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or selects or determines the second physical random access channel timing based on the second synchronous broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information.
可选地,终端设备通过各参数确定如何进行SSB分组,包括终端设备根据突发中同步广播块位置参数选取或确定用于传输的同步广播块;和/或,在服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共配置信息元素中增加第二突发中同步广播块位置参数;和/或,在突发中同步广播块位置参数中增加第二组在一个组参数和组状态参数,和/或第二组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项。Optionally, the terminal device determines how to perform SSB grouping through various parameters, including the terminal device selecting or determining the synchronized broadcast block for transmission based on the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the burst; and/or, adding a second synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the burst to the service cell common system information block configuration information element and/or the service cell common configuration information element; and/or, adding a second group of in-group parameters and group status parameters, and/or at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters to the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the burst.
可选地,所述方法还包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the method further comprises at least one of the following:
终端设备根据第一突发中同步广播块位置参数得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二突发中同步广播块位置参数得到第二组同步广播块;The terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the first burst, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the second burst;
终端设备根据每个元素的同步广播块个数参数和/或元素的排列图样参数,对候选同步广播块和/或用于传输的同步广播块进行分组,得到第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块;The terminal device groups candidate synchronized broadcast blocks and/or synchronized broadcast blocks for transmission according to the synchronized broadcast block number parameter of each element and/or the arrangement pattern parameter of the element to obtain a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks;
终端设备根据第一组在一个组参数和/或组状态参数得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二组在一个组参数和/或组状态参数得到第二组同步广播块;The terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the first group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the second group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters;
终端设备根据第一组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二组 短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项得到第二组同步广播块。The terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on at least one of the first group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters.
可选地,所述方法还包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the method further comprises at least one of the following:
终端设备基于第一下行控制信息和/或第一组同步广播块选取或确定第一同步广播块;The terminal device selects or determines the first synchronous broadcast block based on the first downlink control information and/or the first group of synchronous broadcast blocks;
终端设备基于第二下行控制信息和/或第二组同步广播块选取或确定第二同步广播块。The terminal device selects or determines the second synchronization broadcast block based on the second downlink control information and/or the second group of synchronization broadcast blocks.
可选地,终端设备根据第一下行控制信息中第一同步广播块索引值和/或第一物理随机接入信道掩码索引值选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或,根据第二下行控制信息中第二同步广播块索引值和/或第二物理随机接入信道掩码索引值选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机;Optionally, the terminal device selects or determines the first physical random access channel timing according to the first synchronization broadcast block index value and/or the first physical random access channel mask index value in the first downlink control information, and/or selects or determines the second physical random access channel timing according to the second synchronization broadcast block index value and/or the second physical random access channel mask index value in the second downlink control information;
可选地,网络设备对同步广播块与物理随机接入信道时机的关联方法设计约束关系,终端设备基于约束关系及第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于约束关系及第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机;Optionally, the network device designs a constraint relationship for the association method between the synchronous broadcast block and the physical random access channel opportunity, and the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the first synchronous broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the second synchronous broadcast block;
若满足第一预设条件,终端设备根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或从第二同步广播块对应的后续可用的物理随机接入信道时机中选择一个作为第二物理随机接入信道时机;If the first preset condition is met, the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or selects one from the subsequently available physical random access channel opportunities corresponding to the second synchronization broadcast block as the second physical random access channel opportunity;
若满足第二预设条件,终端设备根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或根据第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机;If the second preset condition is met, the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity according to the second synchronization broadcast block;
若满足第三预设条件,终端设备将网络设备标识增加到随机接入无线网络临时标识计算公式,得到改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识,并根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或根据第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机,将改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识关联于第一物理随机接入信道时机和/或第二物理随机接入信道时机。If the third preset condition is met, the terminal device adds the network device identifier to the random access wireless network temporary identifier calculation formula to obtain an improved random access wireless network temporary identifier, and obtains the first physical random access channel timing according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel timing according to the second synchronization broadcast block, and associates the improved random access wireless network temporary identifier with the first physical random access channel timing and/or the second physical random access channel timing.
可选地,在网络设备接收到终端设备发送的第一随机接入前导后,发送包含第一定时提前命令的随机接入响应,可选地,第一定时提前命令用于供终端设备对第一物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整;Optionally, after the network device receives the first random access preamble sent by the terminal device, the network device sends a random access response including a first timing advance command, and optionally, the first timing advance command is used for the terminal device to perform timing adjustment on the first physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal;
可选地,在网络设备接收到终端设备发送的第二随机接入前导后,发送包含第二定时提前命令的随机接入响应,可选地,第二定时提前命令用于供终端设备对第二物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整。Optionally, after the network device receives the second random access preamble sent by the terminal device, it sends a random access response including a second timing advance command. Optionally, the second timing advance command is used for the terminal device to perform timing adjustment on the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal.
可选地,网络设备接收终端设备经过第一定时提前命令定时调整并发送的第一物理上行信道和/或参考信号;和/或,网络设备接收终端设备经过第二定时提前命令定时调整并发送的第二物理上行信道和/或参考信号,则定时调整过程完成。Optionally, the network device receives the first physical uplink channel and/or reference signal sent by the terminal device after the timing adjustment is performed by the first timing advance command; and/or the network device receives the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal sent by the terminal device after the timing adjustment is performed by the second timing advance command, and the timing adjustment process is completed.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过发送下行信息,以使终端设备基于下行信息调整上行定时,在多个网络设备场景中,使随机接入过程能够基于特定一个网络设备进行,使得针对任意一个网络设备的物理上行信道和/或参考信号的定时计算与调整更准确。This embodiment adopts the above scheme, specifically by sending downlink information so that the terminal device adjusts the uplink timing based on the downlink information. In multiple network device scenarios, the random access process can be performed based on a specific network device, so that the timing calculation and adjustment of the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal of any network device are more accurate.
第五实施例Fifth embodiment
在本申请上述实施例的基础上,本实施例进一步公开了前述实施例中的控制方法。Based on the above embodiments of the present application, this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备可能处于单网络设备或者多个网络设备场景下,终端设备通过隐式方式和/或显式方式判断出何时对同步广播块(SSB,Synchronization Signal and PBCH block)进行分组,即:将不同SSB关联到不同的网络设备。此外,终端设备通过各参数确定如何进行SSB分组,其中包括通过每个元素中SSB个数和/或元素的排列图样指示SSB分组。In an embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may be in a single network device or multiple network device scenario, and the terminal device determines when to group the synchronization broadcast block (SSB, Synchronization Signal and PBCH block) in an implicit and/or explicit manner, that is, to associate different SSBs with different network devices. In addition, the terminal device determines how to group the SSBs through various parameters, including indicating the SSB grouping through the number of SSBs in each element and/or the arrangement pattern of the elements.
可选地,根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样对所有的候选SSB进行分组,分为两组候选SSB,每组候选SSB关联于一个网络设备。根据SSB的子载波间隔(SCS,Sub-carrier Space),可以分为案例A至案例G等7种情况。Optionally, all candidate SSBs are grouped according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divided into two groups of candidate SSBs, each group of candidate SSBs is associated with a network device. According to the sub-carrier spacing (SCS) of the SSB, it can be divided into 7 cases, such as case A to case G.
可选地,对于案例A(Case A)(即:15kHz SCS):候选SSB的首个符号的索引值为:{2,8}+14*n。对于非共享频谱信道接入下,根据载波频率大小可以分为两种情况。当载波频率小于或等于3GHz时,n=0,1,每个半帧内可以传输最多4个SSB(Lmax=4)。当载波频率在频率范围1(FR1,Frequency Range 1)内且大于3GHz时,n=0,1,2,3,每个半帧内可以传输最多8个SSB(Lmax=8)。Optionally, for Case A (i.e., 15kHz SCS): the index value of the first symbol of the candidate SSB is: {2,8}+14*n. For non-shared spectrum channel access, it can be divided into two cases according to the carrier frequency. When the carrier frequency is less than or equal to 3GHz, n=0,1, and a maximum of 4 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame (Lmax=4). When the carrier frequency is in frequency range 1 (FR1, Frequency Range 1) and greater than 3GHz, n=0,1,2,3, and a maximum of 8 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame (Lmax=8).
可选地,当载波频率小于或等于3GHz,并且X=Y=2以及所有元素以循环排列图样或者半对半排列图样排列时,第一与第二个候选SSB关联于第一网络设备,第三与第四个候选SSB关联于第二网络设备,参照图9,图9为根据第五实施例示出的控制方法的第一原理示意图,所有候选SSB的排列方式如图9所示。Optionally, when the carrier frequency is less than or equal to 3 GHz, and X=Y=2 and all elements are arranged in a circular pattern or a half-and-half pattern, the first and second candidate SSBs are associated with the first network device, and the third and fourth candidate SSBs are associated with the second network device. Referring to Figure 9, Figure 9 is a first principle schematic diagram of the control method according to the fifth embodiment, and the arrangement of all candidate SSBs is shown in Figure 9.
可选地,当载波频率在频率范围1内且大于3GHz,并且X=Y=2以及所有元素以循环排列图样排列时,第一、第二、第五以及第六个候选SSB关联于第一网络设备,第三、第四、第七以及第八个候选SSB关联于第二网络设备,参照图10,图10为根据第五实施例示出的控制方法的第二原理示意图,所有候选SSB的排列方式如图10所示。Optionally, when the carrier frequency is within the frequency range 1 and greater than 3 GHz, and X=Y=2 and all elements are arranged in a circular pattern, the first, second, fifth and sixth candidate SSBs are associated with the first network device, and the third, fourth, seventh and eighth candidate SSBs are associated with the second network device. Referring to Figure 10, Figure 10 is a second principle schematic diagram of the control method according to the fifth embodiment, and the arrangement of all candidate SSBs is shown in Figure 10.
可选地,当载波频率在频率范围1内且大于3GHz,并且X=Y=4以及所有元素以半对半排列图样排列时,第一、第二、第三以及第四个候选SSB关联于第一网络设备,第五、第六、第七以及第八个候选SSB关联于第二网络设备,参照图11,图11为根据第五实施例示出的控制方法的第三原理示意图,所有候选SSB的排列方式如图11所示。Optionally, when the carrier frequency is within the frequency range 1 and greater than 3 GHz, and X=Y=4 and all elements are arranged in a half-and-half pattern, the first, second, third and fourth candidate SSBs are associated with the first network device, and the fifth, sixth, seventh and eighth candidate SSBs are associated with the second network device. Referring to Figure 11, Figure 11 is a third principle schematic diagram of the control method according to the fifth embodiment, and the arrangement of all candidate SSBs is shown in Figure 11.
可选地,终端设备根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样对所有的候选SSB进行分组,分为两组候选SSB,每组候选SSB关联于一个网络设备。Optionally, the terminal device groups all candidate SSBs according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements into two groups of candidate SSBs, and each group of candidate SSBs is associated with a network device.
可选地,通过服务小区公共配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素中突发中SSB位置参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst)指示一个或者多个用于传输的SSB。如果一个或者多个用于传输的SSB是对应于第一个网络 设备的候选SSB,则这个或者多个用于传输的SSB从第一个网络设备发送;和/或,如果一个或者多个用于传输的SSB是对应于第二个网络设备的候选SSB,则这个或者多个用于传输的SSB从第二个网络设备发送。Optionally, one or more SSBs for transmission are indicated by an SSB position parameter in a burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst) in a serving cell common configuration information element and/or a serving cell common system information block configuration information element. If one or more SSBs for transmission are candidate SSBs corresponding to a first network device, the one or more SSBs for transmission are sent from the first network device; and/or, if one or more SSBs for transmission are candidate SSBs corresponding to a second network device, the one or more SSBs for transmission are sent from the second network device.
可选地,终端设备测量从第一网络设备发送的SSB,并从中找到最佳的SSB,用于后续随机接入信道(RACH,Random Access Channel)流程;和/或,终端设备测量从第二网络设备发送的SSB,并从中找到最佳的SSB,用于后续RACH流程。Optionally, the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the first network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for a subsequent random access channel (RACH) process; and/or, the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the second network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for a subsequent RACH process.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样对所有的候选SSB进行分组,分为两组候选SSB,每组候选SSB关联于一个网络设备。由于其中每个元素中SSB个数(即:X/Y)可以灵活配置,元素的排列图样(例如:循环排列图样或者半对半排列图样)可以灵活配置,因此根据一种元素的排列图样对候选SSB分组,元素排列比较简洁、有规律,和/或,可以复用现有协议的突发中SSB位置参数指示用于传输的SSB,不需对用于传输的SSB做额外的增强。This embodiment uses the above scheme to group all candidate SSBs according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divides them into two groups of candidate SSBs, each group of candidate SSBs is associated with a network device. Since the number of SSBs in each element (i.e., X/Y) can be flexibly configured, the arrangement pattern of the elements (e.g., a cyclic arrangement pattern or a half-half arrangement pattern) can be flexibly configured, the candidate SSBs are grouped according to an arrangement pattern of the elements, and the arrangement of the elements is relatively concise and regular, and/or, the SSB position parameter in the burst of the existing protocol can be reused to indicate the SSB used for transmission, without the need for additional enhancement of the SSB used for transmission.
第六实施例Sixth embodiment
在本申请上述实施例的基础上,本实施例进一步公开了前述实施例中的控制方法。Based on the above embodiments of the present application, this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
在本申请实施例中,根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样,对服务小区公共配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素中突发中SSB位置参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst)指示的用于传输的SSB进行分组,分为两组用于传输的SSB,每组从一个网络设备发送。In an embodiment of the present application, according to the number of SSBs in each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst (for example: ssb-PositionsInBurst) in the serving cell common configuration information element and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element are grouped and divided into two groups of SSBs for transmission, each group being sent from one network device.
可选地,服务小区公共配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素中突发中SSB位置参数指示用于传输的SSB,可选地,该用于传输的SSB的个数至少为2个,可选地,该用于传输的SSB的个数为偶数。Optionally, the SSB position parameter in the burst in the serving cell common configuration information element and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element indicates the SSB used for transmission. Optionally, the number of SSBs used for transmission is at least 2. Optionally, the number of SSBs used for transmission is an even number.
可选地,对于案例A(即:15kHz SCS):候选SSB的首个符号的索引值为:{2,8}+14*n。对于非共享频谱信道接入下,当载波频率在频率范围1内且大于3GHz时,n=0,1,2,3,每个半帧内可以传输最多8个SSB(Lmax=8)。Optionally, for case A (i.e., 15kHz SCS): the index value of the first symbol of the candidate SSB is: {2,8}+14*n. For non-shared spectrum channel access, when the carrier frequency is in frequency range 1 and greater than 3GHz, n=0,1,2,3, and a maximum of 8 SSBs (Lmax=8) can be transmitted in each half frame.
可选地,当突发中SSB位置参数指示第二至第七个SSB是用于传输的SSB,并且X=Y=2以及用于传输的SSB以循环排列图样排列时,第二、第三、第六以及第七个用于传输的SSB从第一网络设备发送,第四以及第五个用于传输的SSB从第二网络设备发送,参照图12,图12为根据第六实施例示出的控制方法的第一原理示意图,所有用于传输的SSB的排列方式如图12所示。Optionally, when the SSB position parameter in the burst indicates that the second to seventh SSBs are SSBs for transmission, and X=Y=2 and the SSBs for transmission are arranged in a cyclic pattern, the second, third, sixth and seventh SSBs for transmission are sent from the first network device, and the fourth and fifth SSBs for transmission are sent from the second network device. Referring to Figure 12, Figure 12 is a first principle schematic diagram of the control method according to the sixth embodiment, and the arrangement of all SSBs for transmission is shown in Figure 12.
可选地,当突发中SSB位置参数指示第二至第七个SSB是用于传输的SSB,并且X=Y=2以及用于传输的SSB以半对半排列图样排列时,第二、第三以及第四个用于传输的SSB从第一网络设备发送,第五、第六以及第七个用于传输的SSB从第二网络设备发送,参照图13,图13为根据第六实施例示出的控制方法的第二原理示意图,所有用于传输的SSB的排列方式如图13所示。Optionally, when the SSB position parameter in the burst indicates that the second to seventh SSBs are SSBs for transmission, and X=Y=2 and the SSBs for transmission are arranged in a half-and-half pattern, the second, third and fourth SSBs for transmission are sent from the first network device, and the fifth, sixth and seventh SSBs for transmission are sent from the second network device. Referring to Figure 13, Figure 13 is a second principle schematic diagram of the control method according to the sixth embodiment, and the arrangement of all SSBs for transmission is shown in Figure 13.
可选地,终端设备根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样,对服务小区公共配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素中突发中SSB位置参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst)指示的用于传输的SSB进行分组,分为两组用于传输的SSB,每组从一个网络设备发送。Optionally, the terminal device groups the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst) in the serving cell common configuration information element and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element according to the number of SSBs in each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divides them into two groups of SSBs for transmission, each group being sent from one network device.
可选地,终端设备测量从第一网络设备发送的SSB,并从中找到最佳的SSB,用于后续RACH流程;和/或,终端设备测量从第二网络设备发送的SSB,并从中找到最佳的SSB,用于后续RACH流程。Optionally, the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the first network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for use in a subsequent RACH process; and/or, the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the second network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for use in a subsequent RACH process.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样,对服务小区公共配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素中突发中SSB位置参数指示的用于传输的SSB进行分组,分为两组用于传输的SSB,每组从一个网络设备发送。由于其中每个元素中SSB个数(即:X/Y)可以灵活配置,元素的排列图样(例如:循环排列图样或者半对半排列图样)可以灵活配置,因此根据一种元素的排列图样直接对用于传输的SSB分组,简单直接,元素排列比较简洁、有规律。This embodiment uses the above scheme, specifically by grouping the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst in the serving cell common configuration information element and/or the serving cell common system information block configuration information element according to the number of SSBs in each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, into two groups of SSBs for transmission, each group being sent from a network device. Since the number of SSBs in each element (i.e., X/Y) can be flexibly configured, the arrangement pattern of the elements (e.g., a cyclic arrangement pattern or a half-by-half arrangement pattern) can be flexibly configured, it is simple and direct to directly group the SSBs for transmission according to an arrangement pattern of the elements, and the arrangement of the elements is relatively concise and regular.
第七实施例Seventh embodiment
在本申请上述实施例的基础上,本实施例进一步公开了前述实施例中的控制方法。Based on the above embodiments of the present application, this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
在本申请实施例中,还通过服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共配置信息元素直接指示两组用于传输的SSB。In an embodiment of the present application, two groups of SSBs for transmission are also directly indicated through a serving cell common system information block configuration information element and/or a serving cell common configuration information element.
可选地,服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素(例如:ServingCellConfigCommonSIB)通过系统信息块1(例如:SIB1)配置,该信息元素用于提供小区参数。Optionally, a serving cell common system information block configuration information element (eg, ServingCellConfigCommonSIB) is configured via system information block 1 (eg, SIB1), and the information element is used to provide cell parameters.
可选地,通过直接增加第二个突发中SSB位置参数指示第二个网络设备用于传输的SSB,具体包括:Optionally, directly adding an SSB position parameter in the second burst to indicate the SSB used by the second network device for transmission specifically includes:
在服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素中增加第二个突发中SSB位置参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst2),该参数中包含在一个组参数(例如:inOneGroup)和组状态参数(例如:groupPresence)等两个参数。第一个突发中SSB位置参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst)用于指示第一网络设备用于传输的SSB,第二个突发中SSB位置参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst2)用于指示第二网络设备用于传输的SSB。A second SSB position parameter in burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst2) is added to the serving cell common system information block configuration information element, which includes two parameters, namely, a group parameter (e.g., inOneGroup) and a group state parameter (e.g., groupPresence). The first SSB position parameter in burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst) is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission by the first network device, and the second SSB position parameter in burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst2) is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission by the second network device.
可选地,各个参数的使用方法如下:Optionally, the parameters are used as follows:
可选地,在一个组参数:包括第一个突发中SSB位置参数和第二个突发中SSB位置参数中的在一个组参数。当每个半帧内可以传输最多4个SSB时,该参数只有最左边的4比特有效;当每个半帧内可以传输最多8个或64个SSB时,该参数的8比特都有效。当每个半帧内可以传输最多4个或8个SSB时,该参数中第一/最左边比特对应SSB 0,第二比 特对应SSB 1,以此类推。当每个半帧内可以传输最多64个SSB时,该参数中第一/最左边比特对应一组中第一个SSB(例如:SSB 0,SSB 8,以此类推),第二比特对应一组中第二个SSB(例如:SSB 1,SSB 9,以此类推)。该参数中某一比特值为0,表示该比特对应的SSB未用于传输;该参数中某一比特值为1,表示该比特对应的SSB用于传输。Optionally, in a group parameter: a group parameter including a first burst SSB position parameter and a second burst SSB position parameter. When a maximum of 4 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, only the leftmost 4 bits of the parameter are valid; when a maximum of 8 or 64 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, all 8 bits of the parameter are valid. When a maximum of 4 or 8 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, the first/leftmost bit in the parameter corresponds to SSB 0, the second bit corresponds to SSB 1, and so on. When a maximum of 64 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, the first/leftmost bit in the parameter corresponds to the first SSB in a group (for example: SSB 0, SSB 8, and so on), and the second bit corresponds to the second SSB in a group (for example: SSB 1, SSB 9, and so on). If a bit value in the parameter is 0, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is not used for transmission; if a bit value in the parameter is 1, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is used for transmission.
可选地,组状态参数:包括第一个突发中SSB位置参数和第二个突发中SSB位置参数中的组状态参数。当每个半帧内可以传输最多64个SSB时,该参数中第一/最左边比特对应SSB 0-7,第二比特对应SSB 8-15,以此类推。该参数中某一比特值为0,表示该比特对应的SSB未用于传输;该参数中某一比特值为1,表示该比特对应的SSB用于传输。Optionally, group status parameter: includes group status parameters in the SSB position parameter in the first burst and the SSB position parameter in the second burst. When a maximum of 64 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, the first/leftmost bit in this parameter corresponds to SSB 0-7, the second bit corresponds to SSB 8-15, and so on. If a bit value in this parameter is 0, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is not used for transmission; if a bit value in this parameter is 1, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is used for transmission.
Figure PCTCN2022129006-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022129006-appb-000001
可选地,通过突发中SSB位置参数增加第二组参数指示第二个网络设备用于传输的SSB,具体包括:Optionally, a second set of parameters is added through the SSB position parameter in the burst to indicate the SSB used by the second network device for transmission, specifically including:
在突发中SSB位置参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst)中增加第二个在一个组参数(例如:inOneGroup2)以及第二个组状态参数(例如:groupPresence2)等两个参数。第一个在一个组参数(例如:inOneGroup)和第一个组状态参数(例如:groupPresence)用于指示第一网络设备的用于传输的SSB,第二个在一个组参数(例如:inOneGroup2)和第二个组状态参数(例如:groupPresence2)用于指示第二网络设备的用于传输的SSB。可选地,各个参数的使用方法如下:Add two parameters, namely, a second in-group parameter (e.g., inOneGroup2) and a second group status parameter (e.g., groupPresence2) to the SSB position parameter in the burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst). The first in-group parameter (e.g., inOneGroup) and the first group status parameter (e.g., groupPresence) are used to indicate the SSB for transmission of the first network device, and the second in-group parameter (e.g., inOneGroup2) and the second group status parameter (e.g., groupPresence2) are used to indicate the SSB for transmission of the second network device. Optionally, the use of each parameter is as follows:
可选地,在一个组参数:包括第一个在一个组参数和第二个在一个组参数。当每个半帧内可以传输最多4个SSB时,该参数只有最左边的4比特有效;当每个半帧内可以传输最多8个或64个SSB时,该参数的8比特都有效。当每个半帧内可以传输最多4个或8个SSB时,该参数中第一/最左边比特对应SSB 0,第二比特对应SSB 1,以此类推。当每个半帧内可以传输最多64个SSB时,该参数中第一/最左边比特对应一组中第一个SSB(例如:SSB 0,SSB8,以此类推),第二比特对应一组中第二个SSB(例如:SSB 1,SSB 9,以此类推)。该参数中某一比特值为0,表示该比特对应的SSB未用于传输;该参数中某一比特值为1,表示该比特对应的SSB用于传输。Optionally, in a group parameter: includes a first in a group parameter and a second in a group parameter. When a maximum of 4 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, only the leftmost 4 bits of this parameter are valid; when a maximum of 8 or 64 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, all 8 bits of this parameter are valid. When a maximum of 4 or 8 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, the first/leftmost bit in this parameter corresponds to SSB 0, the second bit corresponds to SSB 1, and so on. When a maximum of 64 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, the first/leftmost bit in this parameter corresponds to the first SSB in a group (for example: SSB 0, SSB8, and so on), and the second bit corresponds to the second SSB in a group (for example: SSB 1, SSB 9, and so on). If a bit value in this parameter is 0, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is not used for transmission; if a bit value in this parameter is 1, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is used for transmission.
可选地,组状态参数:包括第一个组状态参数和第二个组状态参数。当每个半帧内可以传输最多64个SSB时,该参数中第一/最左边比特对应SSB 0-7,第二比特对应SSB 8-15,以此类推。该参数中某一比特值为0,表示该比特对应的SSB未用于传输;该参数中某一比特值为1,表示该比特对应的SSB用于传输。Optionally, group status parameter: includes a first group status parameter and a second group status parameter. When a maximum of 64 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, the first/leftmost bit in this parameter corresponds to SSB 0-7, the second bit corresponds to SSB 8-15, and so on. If a bit value in this parameter is 0, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is not used for transmission; if a bit value in this parameter is 1, it means that the SSB corresponding to the bit is used for transmission.
Figure PCTCN2022129006-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2022129006-appb-000002
可选地,通过服务小区公共配置信息元素指示包括直接增加第二个突发中SSB位置参数和/或突发中SSB位置参数增加第二组参数指示第二个网络设备用于传输的SSB。Optionally, the indication through the serving cell common configuration information element includes directly adding an SSB position parameter in a second burst and/or adding a second set of parameters to the SSB position parameter in the burst to indicate the SSB used by the second network device for transmission.
可选地,直接增加第二个突发中SSB位置参数指示第二个网络设备用于传输的SSB具体包括:Optionally, directly adding the SSB position parameter in the second burst to indicate the SSB used by the second network device for transmission specifically includes:
在服务小区公共配置信息元素中增加第二个突发中SSB位置参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst2),该参数中包含短位图参数(例如:shortBitmap)、中位图参数(例如:mediumBitmap)以及长位图参数(例如:longBitmap)等三个参数。第一个突发中SSB位置参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst)用于指示第一网络设备用于传输的SSB,第二个突发中SSB位置参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst2)用于指示第二网络设备用于传输的SSB。The second SSB position parameter in the burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst2) is added to the serving cell common configuration information element, which includes three parameters: a short bitmap parameter (e.g., shortBitmap), a medium bitmap parameter (e.g., mediumBitmap), and a long bitmap parameter (e.g., longBitmap). The first SSB position parameter in the burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst) is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission by the first network device, and the second SSB position parameter in the burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst2) is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission by the second network device.
可选地,各个参数的使用方法如下:Optionally, the parameters are used as follows:
短位图参数:包括第一个突发中SSB位置参数和第二个突发中SSB位置参数中的短位图参数。当每个半帧内可以传输最多4个SSB时,该参数用于指示对应的网络设备的用于传输的SSB。Short bitmap parameter: includes the short bitmap parameter in the SSB position parameter in the first burst and the SSB position parameter in the second burst. When a maximum of 4 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, this parameter is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission of the corresponding network device.
中位图参数:包括第一个突发中SSB位置参数和第二个突发中SSB位置参数中的中位图参数。当每个半帧内可以传输最多8个SSB时,该参数用于指示对应的网络设备的用于传输的SSB。Middle bitmap parameter: includes the middle bitmap parameter in the SSB position parameter in the first burst and the SSB position parameter in the second burst. When a maximum of 8 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, this parameter is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission of the corresponding network device.
长位图参数:包括第一个突发中SSB位置参数和第二个突发中SSB位置参数中的长位图参数。当每个半帧内可以传输最多64个SSB时,该参数用于指示对应的网络设备的用于传输的SSB。Long bitmap parameter: includes the long bitmap parameter in the SSB position parameter in the first burst and the SSB position parameter in the second burst. When a maximum of 64 SSBs can be transmitted in each half frame, this parameter is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission of the corresponding network device.
Figure PCTCN2022129006-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2022129006-appb-000003
可选地,通过突发中SSB位置参数增加第二组参数指示第二个网络设备用于传输的SSB具体包括:Optionally, adding a second set of parameters through an SSB position parameter in a burst to indicate that the second network device uses an SSB for transmission specifically includes:
在突发中SSB位置参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst)中增加第二个短位图参数(例如:shortBitmap2)、第二个中位图参数(例如:mediumBitmap2)以及第二个长位图参数(例如:longBitmap2)等三个参数。第一个短位图参数(例如:shortBitmap)、第一个中位图参数(例如:mediumBitmap)以及第一个长位图参数(例如:longBitmap)用于指示第一网络设备的用于传输的SSB;第二个短位图参数(例如:shortBitmap2)、第二个中位图参数(例如:mediumBitmap2)以及第二个长位图参数(例如:longBitmap2)用于指示第二网络设备的用于传输的SSB。Add three parameters, namely, a second short bitmap parameter (e.g., shortBitmap2), a second medium bitmap parameter (e.g., mediumBitmap2), and a second long bitmap parameter (e.g., longBitmap2) to the SSB position parameter in the burst (e.g., ssb-PositionsInBurst). The first short bitmap parameter (e.g., shortBitmap), the first medium bitmap parameter (e.g., mediumBitmap), and the first long bitmap parameter (e.g., longBitmap) are used to indicate the SSB for transmission of the first network device; the second short bitmap parameter (e.g., shortBitmap2), the second medium bitmap parameter (e.g., mediumBitmap2), and the second long bitmap parameter (e.g., longBitmap2) are used to indicate the SSB for transmission of the second network device.
可选地,各个参数的使用方法如下:Optionally, the parameters are used as follows:
短位图参数:包括第一个短位图参数和第二个短位图参数。当每个半帧内可以传输最多4个时,该参数用于指示对应的网络设备的用于传输的SSB。Short bitmap parameter: includes the first short bitmap parameter and the second short bitmap parameter. When a maximum of 4 bits can be transmitted in each half frame, this parameter is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission of the corresponding network device.
中位图参数:包括第一个中位图参数和第二个中位图参数。当每个半帧内可以传输最多8个时,该参数用于指示对应的网络设备的用于传输的SSB。Middle bitmap parameter: includes the first middle bitmap parameter and the second middle bitmap parameter. When a maximum of 8 bits can be transmitted in each half frame, this parameter is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission of the corresponding network device.
长位图参数:包括第一个长位图参数和第二个长位图参数。当每个半帧内可以传输最多64个时,该参数用于指示对应的网络设备的用于传输的SSB。Long bitmap parameter: includes the first long bitmap parameter and the second long bitmap parameter. When a maximum of 64 bits can be transmitted in each half frame, this parameter is used to indicate the SSB used for transmission of the corresponding network device.
Figure PCTCN2022129006-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2022129006-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2022129006-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2022129006-appb-000005
可选地,通过两个/组参数可以得到第一和第二网络设备的用于传输的SSB,第一网络设备的用于传输的任意一个SSB可以不同于第二网络设备用于传输的SSB,例如:SSB 0是第一网络设备用于传输的SSB,那么,SSB 0就不是第二网络设备用于传输的SSB。此外,如果终端设备能力支持,可以为不同的网络设备指示相同的SSB,此时,这两个/组参数的配置不受限制,可以灵活指示第一和第二网络设备的用于传输的SSB。Optionally, the SSBs used for transmission of the first and second network devices can be obtained through two/groups of parameters, and any SSB used for transmission of the first network device can be different from the SSB used for transmission of the second network device. For example, if SSB 0 is the SSB used for transmission of the first network device, then SSB 0 is not the SSB used for transmission of the second network device. In addition, if the terminal device capability supports it, the same SSB can be indicated for different network devices. At this time, the configuration of these two/groups of parameters is not restricted, and the SSBs used for transmission of the first and second network devices can be flexibly indicated.
可选地,终端设备通过两个参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst和ssb-PositionsInBurst2)或两组参数(例如:两组inOneGroup和groupPresence,或者两组shortBitmap、mediumBitmap和longBitmap)可以直接得到第一和第二网络设备的用于传输的SSB。Optionally, the terminal device can directly obtain the SSB for transmission of the first and second network devices through two parameters (for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2) or two groups of parameters (for example, two groups of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two groups of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap and longBitmap).
可选地,终端设备测量从第一网络设备发送的SSB,并从中找到最佳的SSB,用于后续RACH流程;和/或,终端设备测量从第二网络设备发送的SSB,并从中找到最佳的SSB,用于后续RACH流程。Optionally, the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the first network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for use in a subsequent RACH process; and/or, the terminal device measures the SSB sent from the second network device and finds the best SSB therefrom for use in a subsequent RACH process.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共配置信息元素直接指示两组用于传输的SSB。可以灵活指示两个网络设备传输任意的SSB,不受元素的排列图样的限制;在传输相同数量SSB的情况下,不仅实现多种元素的排列图样,还可以实现其他的无规则的排列图样,SSB的覆盖可以灵活调整。This embodiment uses the above solution to directly indicate two groups of SSBs for transmission through the serving cell common system information block configuration information element and/or the serving cell common configuration information element. Two network devices can be flexibly instructed to transmit any SSB without being restricted by the arrangement pattern of the elements; when transmitting the same number of SSBs, not only multiple arrangement patterns of elements can be realized, but also other irregular arrangement patterns can be realized, and the coverage of SSB can be flexibly adjusted.
第八实施例Eighth embodiment
在本申请上述实施例的基础上,本实施例进一步公开了前述实施例中的控制方法。Based on the above embodiments of the present application, this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
在本申请实施例中,如果终端设备针对两个网络设备选出两个最佳的SSB,根据这两个最佳的SSB得到两个时域上相同的PRACH occasion,则终端设备向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导(例如:preamble)时都使用时域上相同的PRACH occasion,这对终端设备的能力要求较高。如果终端设备不支持同时向第一网络设备和第二网络设备发送随机接入前导,为避免在时域上相同的PRACH occasion向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,设计了以下几种方法:In the embodiment of the present application, if the terminal device selects two best SSBs for two network devices, and obtains two PRACH occasions that are the same in the time domain according to the two best SSBs, the terminal device uses the same PRACH occasion in the time domain when sending random access preambles (e.g., preambles) to the two network devices, which places high requirements on the capabilities of the terminal device. If the terminal device does not support sending random access preambles to the first network device and the second network device at the same time, in order to avoid sending random access preambles to the two network devices at the same PRACH occasion in the time domain, the following methods are designed:
在SSB对应的后续可用的PRACH occasion发送随机接入前导;Send a random access preamble on the subsequent available PRACH occasion corresponding to the SSB;
对SSB与PRACH occasion的关联方法设计约束关系;Design constraints on the association method between SSB and PRACH occasion;
直接在时域上不相同的PRACH occasion发送随机接入前导。The random access preamble is sent directly on different PRACH occasions in the time domain.
可选地,对于在SSB对应的后续可用的PRACH occasion发送随机接入前导,如果终端设备需要向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,并且针对两个网络设备选出的最佳的SSB都关联到时域上相同的PRACH occasion,终端设备不期望在时域上相同的PRACH occasion向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,即:终端设备选择两个时域上不相同的PRACH occasion向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导。此时,终端设备先向其中一个网络设备发送随机接入前导,这个网络设备可以是第一网络设备或者第二网络设备。同时,终端设备根据另一个网络设备对应的最佳SSB得到其关联的后续可用的PRACH occasion,终端设备从中选择一个PRACH occasion向该网络设备发送随机接入前导,可选地,终端设备可以选择下一个可用的PRACH occasion发送随机接入前导。可选地,后续可用的PRACH occasion可以是时域上的后续可用的PRACH occasion,可选地,后续可用的PRACH occasion指PRACH occasion索引值较大的。Optionally, for sending a random access preamble in a subsequent available PRACH occasion corresponding to an SSB, if the terminal device needs to send a random access preamble to two network devices, and the best SSBs selected for the two network devices are associated with the same PRACH occasion in the time domain, the terminal device does not expect to send a random access preamble to the two network devices in the same PRACH occasion in the time domain, that is: the terminal device selects two different PRACH occasions in the time domain to send a random access preamble to the two network devices. At this time, the terminal device first sends a random access preamble to one of the network devices, which can be the first network device or the second network device. At the same time, the terminal device obtains the subsequent available PRACH occasion associated with the other network device according to the best SSB corresponding to the other network device, and the terminal device selects a PRACH occasion from it to send a random access preamble to the network device. Optionally, the terminal device can select the next available PRACH occasion to send a random access preamble. Optionally, the subsequently available PRACH occasion may be a subsequently available PRACH occasion in the time domain. Optionally, the subsequently available PRACH occasion refers to a PRACH occasion with a larger index value.
参照图14,图14为根据第八实施例示出的控制方法的第一原理示意图,如图14所示,在时域上选择后续可用的PRACH occasion,可选地,在一个SSB突发周期传输的SSB为8个,消息1频分复用参数(例如:msg1-FDM)为4,每个随机接入信道时机的SSB数N为2,可选地,N由每个随机接入信道时机的SSB数与每个SSB的基于竞争的前导数参数(例如:ssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB)提供。此时,第一网络设备和第二网络设备对应的最佳SSB分别是SSB 0与SSB 1,终端设备在PRACH occasion1向第一网络设备发送随机接入前导;对于第二网络设备,下一个随机接入信道配置周期的PRACH occasion1是后续可用的PRACH occasion,终端设备在下一个周期的PRACH occasion1向第二网络设备发送随机接入前导。Referring to FIG. 14, FIG. 14 is a first principle schematic diagram of a control method according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 14, a subsequent available PRACH occasion is selected in the time domain. Optionally, the number of SSBs transmitted in one SSB burst period is 8, the frequency division multiplexing parameter of message 1 (e.g., msg1-FDM) is 4, and the number of SSBs N for each random access channel opportunity is 2. Optionally, N is provided by the number of SSBs for each random access channel opportunity and the contention-based preamble number parameter for each SSB (e.g., ssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB). At this time, the best SSBs corresponding to the first network device and the second network device are SSB 0 and SSB 1, respectively, and the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the first network device in PRACH occasion 1; for the second network device, the PRACH occasion 1 of the next random access channel configuration period is a subsequently available PRACH occasion, and the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the second network device in the PRACH occasion 1 of the next period.
可选地,对SSB与PRACH occasion的关联方法设计约束关系,终端设备针对两个网络设备选出两个最佳的SSB,从而根据这两个最佳的SSB得到两个时域上不相同的PRACH occasion。有以下约束关系的设计方法,当处于多个网络设备场景时,网络设备将消息1频分复用参数设置为1和/或每个随机接入信道时机的SSB数N设置为1。终端设备针对两个网络设备选出两个最佳的SSB,即:第一SSB和第二SSB,基于约束关系及第一SSB得到第一PRACH occasion,和/或,基于约束关系及第二SSB得到第二PRACH occasion,其中,这两个PRACH occasion在时域上不相同。Optionally, a constraint relationship is designed for the association method of SSB and PRACH occasion, and the terminal device selects two optimal SSBs for two network devices, thereby obtaining two PRACH occasions that are different in the time domain based on the two optimal SSBs. There is a design method with the following constraint relationship, when in a multiple network device scenario, the network device sets the frequency division multiplexing parameter of message 1 to 1 and/or sets the number of SSBs N for each random access channel opportunity to 1. The terminal device selects two optimal SSBs for two network devices, namely: a first SSB and a second SSB, obtains a first PRACH occasion based on the constraint relationship and the first SSB, and/or obtains a second PRACH occasion based on the constraint relationship and the second SSB, wherein the two PRACH occasions are different in the time domain.
可选地,如果终端设备针对两个网络设备选出的两个最佳的SSB,这两个SSB关联的两个PRACH occasion在时域上至少间隔X个时间单元,即:时域上不同的PRACH occasion,终端设备可以直接在对应的PRACH occasion向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,可选地,X是整数,可以通过默认值设定、根据终端设备能力得到以及通过网络设备指示等至少一种方法得到;时间单元可以是符号(例如:symbol)、时隙(例如:slot)、子帧(例如:subframe)、帧(例如:frame)、毫秒(例如:ms)以及秒(例如:s)等至少一种。只要根据两个网络设备对应的最佳的SSB选择出时域上不同的PRACH occasion,终端设备可以直接在对应的PRACH occasion向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导。Optionally, if the terminal device selects two best SSBs for two network devices, and the two PRACH occasions associated with the two SSBs are at least X time units apart in the time domain, that is, different PRACH occasions in the time domain, the terminal device can directly send random access preambles to the two network devices in the corresponding PRACH occasions, and optionally, X is an integer, which can be obtained by at least one method such as setting by default value, obtaining according to the terminal device capability, and indicating by the network device; the time unit can be at least one of a symbol (e.g., symbol), a time slot (e.g., slot), a subframe (e.g., subframe), a frame (e.g., frame), a millisecond (e.g., ms), and a second (e.g., s). As long as different PRACH occasions in the time domain are selected according to the best SSBs corresponding to the two network devices, the terminal device can directly send random access preambles to the two network devices in the corresponding PRACH occasions.
参照图15,图15为根据第八实施例示出的控制方法的第二原理示意图,如图15所示,两个最佳的SSB关联的两个PRACH occasion在时域上不相同,可选地,在一个SSB突发周期传输的SSB为8个,消息1频分复用参数为4,每 个随机接入信道时机的SSB数N为1。此时,第一网络设备和第二网络设备对应的最佳SSB分别是SSB 0与SSB 5,终端设备分别在PRACH occasion1与PRACH occasion6向第一网络设备和第二网络设备发送随机接入前导。Referring to FIG. 15 , FIG. 15 is a second principle schematic diagram of the control method according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 15 , two PRACH occasions associated with two optimal SSBs are different in the time domain. Optionally, 8 SSBs are transmitted in one SSB burst cycle, the frequency division multiplexing parameter of message 1 is 4, and the number of SSBs N for each random access channel opportunity is 1. At this time, the optimal SSBs corresponding to the first network device and the second network device are SSB 0 and SSB 5, respectively, and the terminal device sends random access preambles to the first network device and the second network device at PRACH occasion 1 and PRACH occasion 6, respectively.
本实施例通过上述方案,如果终端设备不支持同时向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,通过在SSB对应的后续可用的PRACH occasion发送随机接入前导;和/或,对SSB与PRACH occasion的关联方法设计约束关系;和/或,直接在时域上不相同的PRACH occasion发送随机接入前导,终端设备可以选择两个不相同PRACH occasion向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,可选地,这两个不相同PRACH occasion是时域上不相同,避免同时向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导。Through the above scheme, if the terminal device does not support sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same time, the random access preamble is sent by a subsequent available PRACH occasion corresponding to the SSB; and/or, a constraint relationship is designed for the association method between the SSB and the PRACH occasion; and/or, the random access preamble is directly sent at PRACH occasions that are different in the time domain, and the terminal device can select two different PRACH occasions to send the random access preamble to the two network devices. Optionally, the two different PRACH occasions are different in the time domain to avoid sending the random access preamble to the two network devices at the same time.
第九实施例Ninth embodiment
在本申请上述实施例的基础上,本实施例进一步公开了前述实施例中的控制方法。Based on the above embodiments of the present application, this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
在本申请实施例中,如果终端设备支持同时向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,并且针对两个网络设备选出的最佳的SSB都关联到时域上相同的PRACH occasion,终端设备可以在时域上相同的PRACH occasion向第一网络设备和第二网络设备发送随机接入前导。因此,如果终端设备支持同时向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,无论两个PRACH occasion是否相同,终端设备可以直接在两个PRACH occasion向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导。可选地,有以下例子,第一例子:终端设备可以直接在两个相同的PRACH occasion分别向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,其中,这两个PRACH occasion在时域和频域上都相同;第二例子:终端设备可以直接在两个时域上相同的PRACH occasion分别向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,其中,这两个PRACH occasion在时域上相同,但是频域上不相同;第三例子:终端设备可以直接在两个频域上相同的PRACH occasion分别向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,其中,这两个PRACH occasion在频域上相同,但是时域上不相同;第四例子:终端设备可以直接在两个不相同的PRACH occasion分别向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,其中,这两个PRACH occasion在时域和频域上都不相同。In an embodiment of the present application, if the terminal device supports sending a random access preamble to two network devices at the same time, and the best SSBs selected for the two network devices are associated with the same PRACH occasion in the time domain, the terminal device can send a random access preamble to the first network device and the second network device at the same PRACH occasion in the time domain. Therefore, if the terminal device supports sending a random access preamble to two network devices at the same time, regardless of whether the two PRACH occasions are the same, the terminal device can directly send a random access preamble to the two network devices at the two PRACH occasions. Optionally, there are the following examples, a first example: a terminal device may directly send a random access preamble to two network devices at two identical PRACH occasions, wherein the two PRACH occasions are identical in both time domain and frequency domain; a second example: a terminal device may directly send a random access preamble to two network devices at two identical PRACH occasions in time domain, wherein the two PRACH occasions are identical in time domain but different in frequency domain; a third example: a terminal device may directly send a random access preamble to two network devices at two identical PRACH occasions in frequency domain, wherein the two PRACH occasions are identical in frequency domain but different in time domain; a fourth example: a terminal device may directly send a random access preamble to two network devices at two different PRACH occasions, wherein the two PRACH occasions are different in both time domain and frequency domain.
如果两个PRACH occasion相同时,为区分这两个随机接入过程,本申请实施例中提供以下两种方法:If the two PRACH occasions are the same, in order to distinguish the two random access processes, the following two methods are provided in the embodiments of the present application:
直接通过控制资源集池索引参数标识区分;Directly distinguish by controlling the resource pool index parameter identifier;
通过增强的随机接入无线网络临时标识区分。Distinguished by enhanced random access wireless network temporary identification.
可选地,终端设备可以选择两个随机接入前导分别向两个网络设备发送,在控制资源集池索引参数值为0的控制资源集中根据随机接入无线网络临时标识监测/接收第一物理下行控制信道,该下行控制信道包含下行控制信息用于调度对应第一随机接入前导的随机接入响应;在控制资源集池索引参数值为1的控制资源集中根据随机接入无线网络临时标识监测/接收第二物理下行控制信道,该下行控制信道包含下行控制信息用于调度对应第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应。Optionally, the terminal device may select two random access preambles to send to two network devices respectively, monitor/receive a first physical downlink control channel according to a random access wireless network temporary identifier in a control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource set pool is 0, and the downlink control channel includes downlink control information for scheduling a random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble; monitor/receive a second physical downlink control channel according to a random access wireless network temporary identifier in a control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource set pool is 1, and the downlink control channel includes downlink control information for scheduling a random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble.
可选地,由于每个随机接入过程对应一个随机接入无线网络临时标识(RA-RNTI,Random Access Radio Network Temporary Identifier),可以用于区分随机接入过程。可以通过将网络设备标识增加到现有的随机接入无线网络临时标识计算公式中,以达到区分发送给两个不同网络设备的随机接入前导的目的。可选地,在现有随机接入无线网络临时标识计算公式中上行载波索引值(例如:ul_carrier_id)后面加上网络设备标识,具体的RA-RNTI计算公式是:Optionally, since each random access process corresponds to a random access radio network temporary identifier (RA-RNTI, Random Access Radio Network Temporary Identifier), it can be used to distinguish the random access process. The network device identifier can be added to the existing random access radio network temporary identifier calculation formula to achieve the purpose of distinguishing the random access preambles sent to two different network devices. Optionally, the network device identifier is added after the uplink carrier index value (for example: ul_carrier_id) in the existing random access radio network temporary identifier calculation formula. The specific RA-RNTI calculation formula is:
RA-RNTI=1+s_id+14×t_id+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+G)RA-RNTI=1+s_id+14×t_id+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×(ul_carrier_id+G)
其中,s_id是PRACH occasion的第一个OFDM符号索引值,t_id是PRACH occasion在一个系统帧中第一个时隙的索引值,f_id是PRACH occasion在频域上的索引值,ul_carrier_id是随机接入前导传输的上行载波的索引值。G是网络设备标识,可以有以下可选方案:a)G取值与控制资源集池索引参数(例如:coresetPoolIndex)取值一致,例如:coresetPoolIndex为0标识第一网络设备,此时G取值为0;coresetPoolIndex为1标识第二网络设备,此时G取值为1,b)用SSB分组的索引值标识,c)由于ul_carrier_id取值为0或者1,G取值可以为大于1的数值,以区分网络设备标识,例如:G为2表示该随机接入前导向第一网络设备发送,G为3表示该随机接入前导向第二网络设备发送,反之亦然,d)G取决于定时提前组索引值(TAG,Timing Advance Group),例如:定时提前组索引值为0,G取决于0;定时提前组索引值为1,G取决于1。Wherein, s_id is the first OFDM symbol index value of PRACH occasion, t_id is the index value of the first time slot of PRACH occasion in a system frame, f_id is the index value of PRACH occasion in the frequency domain, and ul_carrier_id is the index value of the uplink carrier of the random access preamble transmission. G is the network device identifier, and the following options are possible: a) The value of G is consistent with the value of the control resource set pool index parameter (for example, coresetPoolIndex), for example, coresetPoolIndex is 0 to identify the first network device, and the value of G is 0; coresetPoolIndex is 1 to identify the second network device, and the value of G is 1; b) It is identified by the index value of the SSB group; c) Since the value of ul_carrier_id is 0 or 1, the value of G can be a number greater than 1 to distinguish the network device identifier, for example, G is 2 to indicate that the random access is directed to the first network device before sending, and G is 3 to indicate that the random access is directed to the second network device before sending, and vice versa; d) G depends on the timing advance group index value (TAG, Timing Advance Group), for example, the timing advance group index value is 0, G depends on 0; the timing advance group index value is 1, G depends on 1.
可选地,在控制资源集池索引参数值为0的控制资源集中根据第一网络设备对应的增强的随机接入无线网络临时标识监测/接收第一物理下行控制信道,该下行控制信道包含下行控制信息用于调度对应第一随机接入前导的随机接入响应;和/或,在控制资源集池索引参数值为1的控制资源集中根据第二网络设备对应的增强的随机接入无线网络临时标识监测/接收第二物理下行控制信道,该下行控制信道包含下行控制信息用于调度对应第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应。Optionally, in a control resource set whose control resource set pool index parameter value is 0, a first physical downlink control channel is monitored/received according to an enhanced random access wireless network temporary identifier corresponding to a first network device, and the downlink control channel includes downlink control information for scheduling a random access response corresponding to a first random access preamble; and/or, in a control resource set whose control resource set pool index parameter value is 1, a second physical downlink control channel is monitored/received according to an enhanced random access wireless network temporary identifier corresponding to a second network device, and the downlink control channel includes downlink control information for scheduling a random access response corresponding to a second random access preamble.
本实施例通过上述方案,如果终端设备支持同时向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,通过控制资源集池索引参数标识区分;和/或,增强的随机接入无线网络临时标识区分。终端设备可以通过两个时域上相同的PRACH occasion向两个网络设备发送随机接入前导,并且能区分两个不同的随机接入过程。In this embodiment, through the above scheme, if the terminal device supports sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same time, the distinction is made by controlling the resource set pool index parameter identifier; and/or, the enhanced random access wireless network temporary identifier is used to distinguish. The terminal device can send random access preambles to two network devices through the same PRACH occasion in two time domains, and can distinguish two different random access processes.
第十实施例Tenth embodiment
在本申请上述实施例的基础上,本实施例进一步公开了前述实施例中的控制方法。Based on the above embodiments of the present application, this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
在本申请实施例中,在基于多个下行控制信息的多个网络设备场景,可以通过控制资源集池索引参数(例如:coresetPoolIndex)取值区分不同网络设备,例如:在控制资源集池索引参数值为0的控制资源集中传输的物理下行控制信道或者由该物理下行控制信道调度的其他物理信道/参考信号都关联于第一网络设备;在控制资源集池索引参数值为1的控制资源集中传输的物理下行控制信道或者由该物理下行控制信道调度的其他物理信道/参考信号都关联于第二网络 设备。In an embodiment of the present application, in a scenario of multiple network devices based on multiple downlink control information, different network devices can be distinguished by taking a control resource pool index parameter (e.g., coresetPoolIndex). For example, a physical downlink control channel transmitted in a control resource set whose control resource pool index parameter value is 0 or other physical channels/reference signals scheduled by the physical downlink control channel are associated with a first network device; a physical downlink control channel transmitted in a control resource set whose control resource pool index parameter value is 1 or other physical channels/reference signals scheduled by the physical downlink control channel are associated with a second network device.
可选地,终端设备根据随机接入响应中的定时提前命令对物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整,其中包括基于非竞争的随机接入的上行定时调整和/或基于竞争的随机接入上行定时调整。Optionally, the terminal device performs timing adjustment on the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal according to the timing advance command in the random access response, including uplink timing adjustment based on non-competition random access and/or uplink timing adjustment based on competition random access.
可选地,在基于多个下行控制信息的多个网络设备场景,可以分别向两个网络设备分别进行基于非竞争的随机接入过程,其步骤如下:Optionally, in a scenario of multiple network devices based on multiple downlink control information, a non-contention-based random access process may be performed on two network devices respectively, and the steps are as follows:
第一步:从控制资源集池索引参数值为0的控制资源集中传输第一物理下行控制信道,第一物理下行控制信道包含下行控制信息(例如:DCI),即:从第一网络设备发送下行控制信息,该下行控制信息包括第一随机接入前导索引值(例如:Random Access Preamble index)、第一SSB索引值(例如:SS/PBCH index)以及第一物理随机接入信道掩码索引值(例如:PRACH Mask Index);和/或,从控制资源集池索引参数值为1的控制资源集中传输第二物理下行控制信道,第二物理下行控制信道包含下行控制信息,即:从第二网络设备发送下行控制信息,该下行控制信息包括第二随机接入前导索引值、第二SSB索引值以及第二物理随机接入信道掩码索引值。可选地,当第一随机接入前导索引值不是全0,表示触发基于非竞争的随机接入;和/或,第二随机接入前导索引值不是全0时,表示触发基于非竞争的随机接入。当触发基于非竞争的随机接入时,随机接入前导索引值由随机接入前导索引值参数(例如:ra-PreambleIndex)配置。可选地,对用于传输的SSB的分为两组,分别对应第一和第二网络设备,第一网络设备从第一网络设备对应的用于传输的SSB中选出第一SSB索引值,和/或,第二网络设备从第二网络设备对应的用于传输的SSB中选出第二SSB索引值,两组用于传输的SSB的分组有以下方法:The first step: transmitting a first physical downlink control channel from a control resource set having an index parameter value of 0 in a control resource set pool, the first physical downlink control channel including downlink control information (e.g., DCI), that is, sending downlink control information from a first network device, the downlink control information including a first random access preamble index value (e.g., Random Access Preamble index), a first SSB index value (e.g., SS/PBCH index), and a first physical random access channel mask index value (e.g., PRACH Mask Index); and/or, transmitting a second physical downlink control channel from a control resource set having an index parameter value of 1 in a control resource set pool, the second physical downlink control channel including downlink control information, that is, sending downlink control information from a second network device, the downlink control information including a second random access preamble index value, a second SSB index value, and a second physical random access channel mask index value. Optionally, when the first random access preamble index value is not all 0, it indicates that non-contention-based random access is triggered; and/or, when the second random access preamble index value is not all 0, it indicates that non-contention-based random access is triggered. When non-contention-based random access is triggered, the random access preamble index value is configured by a random access preamble index value parameter (e.g., ra-PreambleIndex). Optionally, the SSB for transmission is divided into two groups, corresponding to the first and second network devices, respectively, the first network device selects a first SSB index value from the SSB for transmission corresponding to the first network device, and/or the second network device selects a second SSB index value from the SSB for transmission corresponding to the second network device, and the two groups of SSBs for transmission are grouped in the following manner:
(1)对候选SSB分组:根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样对所有的候选SSB进行分组,分为两组候选SSB,再结合突发中SSB位置参数可以得到两组用于传输的SSB。(1) Grouping candidate SSBs: All candidate SSBs are grouped according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements into two groups of candidate SSBs. Then, two groups of SSBs for transmission are obtained by combining the SSB position parameters in the burst.
(2)对用于传输的SSB分组:终端设备根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样,对突发中SSB位置参数指示的用于传输的SSB进行分组,分为两组用于传输的SSB。(2) Grouping SSBs for transmission: The terminal device groups the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst according to the number of SSBs in each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divides them into two groups of SSBs for transmission.
(3)直接指示两组用于传输的SSB:通过两个参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst和ssb-PositionsInBurst2)或两组参数(例如:两组inOneGroup和groupPresence,或者两组shortBitmap、mediumBitmap和longBitmap)可以直接得到两组用于传输的SSB。(3) Directly indicating two sets of SSBs for transmission: Two sets of SSBs for transmission can be directly obtained through two parameters (for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2) or two sets of parameters (for example, two sets of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two sets of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap, and longBitmap).
第二步:终端设备根据第一SSB索引值和第一物理随机接入信道掩码索引值确定第一PRACH occasion,并在第一PRACH occasion向第一网络设备发送第一随机接入前导;和/或,终端设备根据第二SSB索引值和第二物理随机接入信道掩码索引值确定第二PRACH occasion,并在第二PRACH occasion向第二网络设备发送第二随机接入前导。可选地,根据终端设备是否支持同时向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导,有以下两种情形:Step 2: The terminal device determines the first PRACH occasion according to the first SSB index value and the first physical random access channel mask index value, and sends the first random access preamble to the first network device at the first PRACH occasion; and/or, the terminal device determines the second PRACH occasion according to the second SSB index value and the second physical random access channel mask index value, and sends the second random access preamble to the second network device at the second PRACH occasion. Optionally, depending on whether the terminal device supports sending random access preambles to two network devices simultaneously, there are the following two situations:
(1)如果终端设备支持同时向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导,无论第一PRACH occasion和第二PRACH occasion在时域上是否相同,终端设备可以直接在第一PRACH occasion向第一网络设备发送随机接入前导,直接在第二PRACH occasion向第二网络设备发送随机接入前导。(1) If the terminal device supports sending random access preambles to two network devices simultaneously, regardless of whether the first PRACH occasion and the second PRACH occasion are the same in the time domain, the terminal device can directly send the random access preamble to the first network device in the first PRACH occasion, and directly send the random access preamble to the second network device in the second PRACH occasion.
(2)如果终端设备不支持同时向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导,终端设备不期望在时域上相同的PRACH occasion传输随机接入前导。可选地,可以通过SSB索引值和物理随机接入信道掩码索引值的配置,使得两个PRACH occasion在时域上不相同。例如:配置SSB索引值和/或物理随机接入信道掩码索引值不相同,再例如:物理随机接入信道掩码索引值是0/9/10时,终端设备可以选择两个时域上不相同的PRACH occasion。(2) If the terminal device does not support sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same time, the terminal device does not expect to transmit random access preambles in the same PRACH occasion in the time domain. Optionally, the two PRACH occasions can be different in the time domain by configuring the SSB index value and the physical random access channel mask index value. For example: when the SSB index value and/or the physical random access channel mask index value are configured to be different, and for another example: when the physical random access channel mask index value is 0/9/10, the terminal device can select two different PRACH occasions in the time domain.
第三步:从控制资源集池索引参数值为0的控制资源集中传输第一物理下行控制信道,第一物理下行控制信道包含下行控制信息,该下行控制消息调度对应第一随机接入前导的随机接入响应,即:从第一网络设备发送对应第一随机接入前导的随机接入响应;和/或,从控制资源集池索引参数值为1的控制资源集中传输第二物理下行控制信道,第二物理下行控制信道包含下行控制信息,该下行控制消息调度对应第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应,即:从第二网络设备发送对应第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应。可选地,包含以下技术特征:Step 3: Transmit the first physical downlink control channel from the control resource set with an index parameter value of 0 in the control resource set pool, the first physical downlink control channel includes downlink control information, and the downlink control message schedules a random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble, that is, the random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble is sent from the first network device; and/or, transmit the second physical downlink control channel from the control resource set with an index parameter value of 1 in the control resource set pool, the second physical downlink control channel includes downlink control information, and the downlink control message schedules a random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble, that is, the random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble is sent from the second network device. Optionally, the following technical features are included:
(1)终端设备假设包含第一随机接入前导索引值的第一物理下行控制信道与包含调度随机接入响应的下行控制信息的第一物理下行控制信道有相同的解调参考信号(DMRS,Demodulation Reference Signal)天线端口准共址特性(QCL,Quasi Co-location),和/或,包含第二随机接入前导索引值的第二物理下行控制信道与包含调度随机接入响应的下行控制信息的第二物理下行控制信道有相同的解调参考信号天线端口准共址特性。(1) The terminal device assumes that the first physical downlink control channel including the first random access preamble index value and the first physical downlink control channel including the downlink control information of the scheduling random access response have the same demodulation reference signal (DMRS) antenna port quasi co-location characteristic (QCL), and/or, the second physical downlink control channel including the second random access preamble index value and the second physical downlink control channel including the downlink control information of the scheduling random access response have the same demodulation reference signal antenna port quasi co-location characteristic.
(2)对应第一与第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应分别在第一与第二随机接入响应窗口中接收,可选地,第一随机接入响应窗口开始于最早的控制资源集的第一个符号,该控制资源集是终端设备用于接收类型1物理下行控制信道公共搜索空间集(例如:Type1-PDCCH CSS set)的物理下行控制信道,可选的,该控制资源集关联的控制资源集池索引参数值为0,同时,第一随机接入响应窗口的起始符号与第一PRACH occasion的最后一个符号至少间隔一个符号;和/或,第二随机接入响应窗口开始于最早的控制资源集的第一个符号,可选地,该控制资源集关联的控制资源集池索引参数值为1,同时,第二随机接入响应窗口的起始符号与第二PRACH occasion的最后一个符号至少间隔一个符号。(2) The random access responses corresponding to the first and second random access preambles are received in the first and second random access response windows, respectively. Optionally, the first random access response window starts at the first symbol of the earliest control resource set, which is a physical downlink control channel used by the terminal device to receive a type 1 physical downlink control channel common search space set (e.g., Type1-PDCCH CSS set). Optionally, a control resource set pool index parameter value associated with the control resource set is 0, and at the same time, the start symbol of the first random access response window is at least one symbol away from the last symbol of the first PRACH occasion; and/or, the second random access response window starts at the first symbol of the earliest control resource set. Optionally, a control resource set pool index parameter value associated with the control resource set is 1, and at the same time, the start symbol of the second random access response window is at least one symbol away from the last symbol of the second PRACH occasion.
(3)对应第一与第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应分别包含第一介质访问控制层(MAC,Media Access Control)随机接入响应(RAR,Random Access Response)和第二MAC随机接入响应,第一MAC随机接入响应中包含第一定时提 前命令(例如:Timing Advance Command),和/或,第二MAC随机接入响应中包含第二定时提前命令,可选地,第一定时提前命令是第一网络设备根据第一随机接入前导计算得到,和/或,第二定时提前命令是第二网络设备根据第二随机接入前导计算得到。可选地,第一MAC随机接入响应中包含第一网络设备标识,用于指示第一定时提前命令应用于向第一网络设备的上行传输;和/或,第二MAC随机接入响应中包含第二网络设备标识,用于指示第二定时提前命令应用于向第二网络设备的上行传输。可选地,该网络设备标识可以是随机前导序列分组索引值,也可以是SSB分组索引值。(3) The random access responses corresponding to the first and second random access preambles respectively include a first media access control layer (MAC) random access response (RAR) and a second MAC random access response, wherein the first MAC random access response includes a first timing advance command (e.g., Timing Advance Command), and/or the second MAC random access response includes a second timing advance command. Optionally, the first timing advance command is calculated by the first network device according to the first random access preamble, and/or the second timing advance command is calculated by the second network device according to the second random access preamble. Optionally, the first MAC random access response includes a first network device identifier, which is used to indicate that the first timing advance command is applied to uplink transmission to the first network device; and/or the second MAC random access response includes a second network device identifier, which is used to indicate that the second timing advance command is applied to uplink transmission to the second network device. Optionally, the network device identifier may be a random preamble sequence group index value or an SSB group index value.
第四步:由控制资源集池索引参数值为0的控制资源集中传输的物理下行控制信道调度的第一物理上行信道(例如:PUSCH/PUCCH)/参考信号(例如:SRS)使用第一定时提前命令进行定时调整;和/或,由控制资源集池索引参数值为1的控制资源集中传输的物理下行控制信道调度的第二物理上行信道/参考信号使用第二定时提前命令进行定时调整。Step 4: The first physical uplink channel (e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH)/reference signal (e.g., SRS) scheduled by the physical downlink control channel transmitted by the control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource pool is 0 is adjusted in timing using the first timing advance command; and/or, the second physical uplink channel/reference signal scheduled by the physical downlink control channel transmitted by the control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource pool is 1 is adjusted in timing using the second timing advance command.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体通过在基于多个下行控制信息的多个网络设备场景,分别向两个网络设备分别进行基于非竞争的随机接入,提高定时调整的准确性。This embodiment uses the above solution to improve the accuracy of timing adjustment by performing non-contention-based random access to two network devices respectively in a scenario of multiple network devices based on multiple downlink control information.
第十一实施例Eleventh Embodiment
在本申请上述实施例的基础上,本实施例进一步公开了前述实施例中的控制方法。Based on the above embodiments of the present application, this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
在本申请实施例中,在基于多个下行控制信息的多个网络设备场景,可以通过控制资源集池索引参数(例如:coresetPoolIndex)区分不同网络设备,例如:在控制资源集池索引参数值为0的控制资源集中传输的物理下行控制信道或者由该物理下行控制信道调度的其他物理信道/参考信号都关联于第一网络设备;在控制资源集池索引参数值为1的控制资源集中传输的物理下行控制信道或者由该物理下行控制信道调度的其他物理信道/参考信号都关联于第二网络设备。In an embodiment of the present application, in a scenario of multiple network devices based on multiple downlink control information, different network devices can be distinguished by a control resource pool index parameter (for example: coresetPoolIndex), for example: the physical downlink control channel transmitted in the control resource set whose control resource pool index parameter value is 0 or other physical channels/reference signals scheduled by the physical downlink control channel are all associated with the first network device; the physical downlink control channel transmitted in the control resource set whose control resource pool index parameter value is 1 or other physical channels/reference signals scheduled by the physical downlink control channel are all associated with the second network device.
可选地,终端设备根据随机接入响应中的定时提前命令对物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整,其中包括基于非竞争的随机接入的上行定时调整和/或基于竞争的随机接入上行定时调整。Optionally, the terminal device performs timing adjustment on the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal according to the timing advance command in the random access response, including uplink timing adjustment based on non-competition random access and/or uplink timing adjustment based on competition random access.
可选地,基于竞争的随机接入包含终端设备发起的基于竞争的随机接入和网络设备发起的基于竞争的随机接入。可选地,终端设备发起的基于竞争的随机接入包括类型1随机接入和类型2随机接入。网络设备发起的基于竞争的随机接入是通过发送下行控制信息指示终端设备进行基于竞争的随机接入,即:从第一网络设备发送下行控制信息触发随机接入过程,和/或,从第二网络设备发送下行控制信息触发随机接入过程,可选地,下行控制信息包括随机接入前导索引值。当基于非竞争的随机接入前导已经用完时,将触发基于竞争的随机接入过程。可选地,如果对随机接入前导进行分组,使两组随机接入前导分别对应两个网络设备,基于非竞争的随机接入前导已经用完表示如果一个网络设备对应的基于非竞争的随机接入前导已经用完,该网络设备将触发基于竞争的随机接入过程。在基于多个下行控制信息的多个网络设备场景,可以分别向两个网络设备分别进行基于竞争的随机接入过程,其步骤如下:Optionally, contention-based random access includes contention-based random access initiated by a terminal device and contention-based random access initiated by a network device. Optionally, contention-based random access initiated by a terminal device includes type 1 random access and type 2 random access. Contention-based random access initiated by a network device is to instruct a terminal device to perform contention-based random access by sending downlink control information, that is, sending downlink control information from a first network device to trigger a random access process, and/or sending downlink control information from a second network device to trigger a random access process, and optionally, the downlink control information includes a random access preamble index value. When a non-contention-based random access preamble has been used up, a contention-based random access process will be triggered. Optionally, if the random access preamble is grouped so that two groups of random access preambles correspond to two network devices respectively, the non-contention-based random access preamble has been used up, indicating that if a non-contention-based random access preamble corresponding to a network device has been used up, the network device will trigger a contention-based random access process. In a scenario of multiple network devices based on multiple downlink control information, a contention-based random access process can be performed to two network devices respectively, and the steps are as follows:
第一步:对于网络设备发起的基于竞争的随机接入,从控制资源集池索引参数值为0的控制资源集中传输第一物理下行控制信道,第一物理下行控制信道包含下行控制信息,即:从第一网络设备发送下行控制信息,该下行控制信息包括第一随机接入前导索引值(例如:Random Access Preamble index);和/或,从控制资源集池索引参数值为1的控制资源集中传输第二物理下行控制信道,第二物理下行控制信道包含下行控制信息,即:从第二网络设备发送下行控制信息,该下行控制信息包括第二随机接入前导索引值。可选地,当随机接入前导索引值是全0时,表示触发基于竞争的随机接入,即:当第一随机接入前导索引值是全0时,终端设备选择最佳SSB并选择第一随机接入前导,再向第一网络设备发送第一随机接入前导,和/或,当第二随机接入前导索引值是全0时,终端设备选择最佳SSB并选择第二随机接入前导,再向第二网络设备发送第二随机接入前导。对于终端设备发起的基于竞争的随机接入,终端设备直接选择最佳SSB并选择第一随机接入前导,再向第一网络设备发送第一随机接入前导,和/或,直接选择最佳SSB并选择第二随机接入前导,再向第二网络设备发送第二随机接入前导。可选地,对用于传输的SSB的分为两组,分别对应第一和第二网络设备,终端设备测量从第一网络设备发送的第一组SSB,并从中选择最佳的SSB,即:第一SSB,和/或,终端设备测量从第二网络设备发送的第二组SSB,并从中选择最佳的SSB,即:第二SSB,两组用于传输的SSB的分组有以下方法:Step 1: For contention-based random access initiated by a network device, a first physical downlink control channel is transmitted from a control resource set with a control resource set pool index parameter value of 0, and the first physical downlink control channel includes downlink control information, that is, downlink control information is sent from the first network device, and the downlink control information includes a first random access preamble index value (e.g., Random Access Preamble index); and/or, a second physical downlink control channel is transmitted from a control resource set with a control resource set pool index parameter value of 1, and the second physical downlink control channel includes downlink control information, that is, downlink control information is sent from the second network device, and the downlink control information includes a second random access preamble index value. Optionally, when the random access preamble index value is all 0, it indicates that contention-based random access is triggered, that is, when the first random access preamble index value is all 0, the terminal device selects the best SSB and selects the first random access preamble, and then sends the first random access preamble to the first network device, and/or, when the second random access preamble index value is all 0, the terminal device selects the best SSB and selects the second random access preamble, and then sends the second random access preamble to the second network device. For contention-based random access initiated by a terminal device, the terminal device directly selects the best SSB and selects the first random access preamble, and then sends the first random access preamble to the first network device, and/or directly selects the best SSB and selects the second random access preamble, and then sends the second random access preamble to the second network device. Optionally, the SSBs for transmission are divided into two groups, corresponding to the first and second network devices, respectively. The terminal device measures the first group of SSBs sent from the first network device and selects the best SSB therefrom, namely, the first SSB, and/or the terminal device measures the second group of SSBs sent from the second network device and selects the best SSB therefrom, namely, the second SSB. The two groups of SSBs for transmission are grouped in the following manner:
(1)对候选SSB分组:根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样对所有的候选SSB进行分组,分为两组候选SSB,再结合突发中SSB位置参数可以得到两组用于传输的SSB。(1) Grouping candidate SSBs: All candidate SSBs are grouped according to the number of SSBs of each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements into two groups of candidate SSBs. Then, two groups of SSBs for transmission are obtained by combining the SSB position parameters in the burst.
(2)对用于传输的SSB分组:终端设备根据每个元素的SSB个数与元素的排列图样,对突发中SSB位置参数指示的用于传输的SSB进行分组,分为两组用于传输的SSB。(2) Grouping SSBs for transmission: The terminal device groups the SSBs for transmission indicated by the SSB position parameter in the burst according to the number of SSBs in each element and the arrangement pattern of the elements, and divides them into two groups of SSBs for transmission.
(3)直接指示两组用于传输的SSB:通过两个参数(例如:ssb-PositionsInBurst和ssb-PositionsInBurst2)或两组参数(例如:两组inOneGroup和groupPresence,或者两组shortBitmap、mediumBitmap和longBitmap)可以直接得到两组用于传输的SSB。(3) Directly indicating two sets of SSBs for transmission: Two sets of SSBs for transmission can be directly obtained through two parameters (for example, ssb-PositionsInBurst and ssb-PositionsInBurst2) or two sets of parameters (for example, two sets of inOneGroup and groupPresence, or two sets of shortBitmap, mediumBitmap, and longBitmap).
第二步:终端设备根据第一SSB确定第一PRACH occasion,和/或,根据第二SSB确定第二PRACH occasion。可选地,根据终端设备是否支持同时向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导,有以下两种情形:Step 2: The terminal device determines the first PRACH occasion according to the first SSB, and/or determines the second PRACH occasion according to the second SSB. Optionally, depending on whether the terminal device supports sending random access preambles to two network devices simultaneously, there are the following two situations:
(1)如果终端设备支持同时向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导,无论第一PRACH occasion和第二PRACH occasion在时域上是否相同,终端设备可以直接在第一PRACH occasion向第一网络设备发送随机接入前导,终端设备可以直接在第二PRACH occasion向第二网络设备发送随机接入前导。(1) If the terminal device supports sending random access preambles to two network devices simultaneously, regardless of whether the first PRACH occasion and the second PRACH occasion are the same in the time domain, the terminal device can directly send the random access preamble to the first network device in the first PRACH occasion, and the terminal device can directly send the random access preamble to the second network device in the second PRACH occasion.
(2)如果终端设备不支持同时向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导,通过以下方法,可以避免终端设备在时域 上相同的PRACH occasion向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导:(2) If the terminal device does not support sending random access preambles to two network devices simultaneously, the following method can be used to avoid the terminal device sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same PRACH occasion in the time domain:
a)在第一个随机接入响应窗口截止前不进行第二个随机接入过程:终端设备先向其中一个网络设备发送随机接入前导,终端设备在随机接入响应窗口截止后向另一个网络设备发送随机接入前导。a) The second random access process is not performed before the first random access response window expires: the terminal device first sends a random access preamble to one of the network devices, and the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the other network device after the random access response window expires.
b)在SSB对应的后续可用的PRACH occasion发送随机接入前导:如果第一PRACH occasion和第二PRACH occasion在时域上相同,终端设备先向一个网络设备发送随机接入前导,根据另一个网络设备对应的最佳SSB得到其关联的后续可用的PRACH occasion,终端设备从中选择一个PRACH occasion向该网络设备发送随机接入前导。b) Sending a random access preamble in the subsequent available PRACH occasion corresponding to the SSB: If the first PRACH occasion and the second PRACH occasion are the same in the time domain, the terminal device first sends a random access preamble to one network device, and obtains the subsequent available PRACH occasion associated with the other network device according to the best SSB corresponding to the other network device. The terminal device selects a PRACH occasion from them to send a random access preamble to the network device.
c)对SSB与PRACH occasion的关联方法设计约束关系:基于约束关系及第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或,基于约束关系及第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机。c) Designing a constraint relationship for the association method between SSB and PRACH occasion: obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and a first synchronous broadcast block, and/or obtaining a second physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and a second synchronous broadcast block.
第三步:终端设备在第一PRACH occasion向第一网络设备发送第一随机接入前导,和/或,在第二PRACH occasion向第二网络设备发送第二随机接入前导。Step 3: The terminal device sends a first random access preamble to the first network device in the first PRACH occasion, and/or sends a second random access preamble to the second network device in the second PRACH occasion.
第四步:从控制资源集池索引参数值为0的控制资源集中传输第一物理下行控制信道,第一物理下行控制信道包含下行控制信息(例如:DCI),该下行控制消息调度对应第一随机接入前导的随机接入响应(例如:MSG2),即:从第一网络设备发送对应第一随机接入前导的随机接入响应,可选地,对于类型2随机接入,从第一网络设备发送对应第一随机接入前导的绝对定时提前命令MAC CE;和/或,从控制资源集池索引参数值为1的控制资源集中传输第二物理下行控制信道,第二物理下行控制信道包含下行控制信息,该下行控制消息调度对应第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应,即:从第二网络设备发送对应第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应,可选地,对于类型2随机接入,从第二网络设备发送对应第二随机接入前导的绝对定时提前命令MAC CE。可选地,包含以下技术特征:Step 4: Transmitting a first physical downlink control channel from a control resource set with an index parameter value of 0 in the control resource set pool, the first physical downlink control channel includes downlink control information (e.g., DCI), and the downlink control message schedules a random access response (e.g., MSG2) corresponding to the first random access preamble, that is, sending a random access response corresponding to the first random access preamble from the first network device, and optionally, for type 2 random access, sending an absolute timing advance command MAC CE corresponding to the first random access preamble from the first network device; and/or, transmitting a second physical downlink control channel from a control resource set with an index parameter value of 1 in the control resource set pool, the second physical downlink control channel includes downlink control information, and the downlink control message schedules a random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble, that is, sending a random access response corresponding to the second random access preamble from the second network device, and optionally, for type 2 random access, sending an absolute timing advance command MAC CE corresponding to the second random access preamble from the second network device. Optionally, the following technical features are included:
(1)终端设备假设包含第一随机接入前导的随机接入响应的物理下行共享信道与第一SSB有相同的解调参考信号天线端口准共址特性,和/或,包含第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应的物理下行共享信道与第二SSB有相同的解调参考信号天线端口准共址特性。可选地,终端设备假设调度随机接入响应的第一物理下行控制信道与第一SSB有相同的解调参考信号天线端口准共址特性,和/或,调度随机接入响应的第二物理下行控制信道与第二SSB有相同的解调参考信号天线端口准共址特性。(1) The terminal device assumes that the physical downlink shared channel of the random access response including the first random access preamble has the same demodulation reference signal antenna port quasi-co-location characteristic as the first SSB, and/or, the physical downlink shared channel of the random access response including the second random access preamble has the same demodulation reference signal antenna port quasi-co-location characteristic as the second SSB. Optionally, the terminal device assumes that the first physical downlink control channel of the scheduling random access response has the same demodulation reference signal antenna port quasi-co-location characteristic as the first SSB, and/or, the second physical downlink control channel of the scheduling random access response has the same demodulation reference signal antenna port quasi-co-location characteristic as the second SSB.
(2)对应第一与第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应分别在第一与第二随机接入响应窗口中接收,可选地,第一随机接入响应窗口开始于最早的控制资源集的第一个符号,该控制资源集是终端设备用于接收类型1物理下行控制信道公共搜索空间集(例如:Type1-PDCCH CSS set)的物理下行控制信道,可选地,该控制资源集关联的控制资源集池索引参数值为0,同时,第一随机接入响应窗口的起始符号与第一PRACH occasion的最后一个符号至少间隔一个符号;和/或,第二随机接入响应窗口开始于最早的控制资源集的第一个符号,可选地,该控制资源集关联的控制资源集池索引参数值为1,同时,第二随机接入响应窗口的起始符号与第二PRACH occasion的最后一个符号至少间隔一个符号。(2) The random access responses corresponding to the first and second random access preambles are received in the first and second random access response windows, respectively. Optionally, the first random access response window starts at the first symbol of the earliest control resource set, which is a physical downlink control channel used by the terminal device to receive a type 1 physical downlink control channel common search space set (e.g., Type1-PDCCH CSS set). Optionally, a control resource set pool index parameter value associated with the control resource set is 0, and at the same time, the start symbol of the first random access response window is at least one symbol away from the last symbol of the first PRACH occasion; and/or, the second random access response window starts at the first symbol of the earliest control resource set. Optionally, a control resource set pool index parameter value associated with the control resource set is 1, and at the same time, the start symbol of the second random access response window is at least one symbol away from the last symbol of the second PRACH occasion.
(3)对应第一与第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应分别包含第一MAC随机接入响应(例如:MAC RAR)和第二MAC随机接入响应,第一MAC随机接入响应中包含第一定时提前命令(例如:Timing Advance Command),和/或,第二MAC随机接入响应中包含第二定时提前命令,可选地,第一定时提前命令是第一网络设备根据第一随机接入前导计算得到,和/或,第二定时提前命令是第二网络设备根据第二随机接入前导计算得到。可选地,第一MAC随机接入响应中包含第一网络设备标识,用于指示第一定时提前命令应用于向第一网络设备的上行传输;和/或,第二MAC随机接入响应中包含第二网络设备标识,用于指示第二定时提前命令应用于向第二网络设备的上行传输。可选地,该网络设备标识可以是随机前导序列分组索引值,也可以是SSB分组索引值。(3) The random access responses corresponding to the first and second random access preambles respectively include a first MAC random access response (e.g., MAC RAR) and a second MAC random access response, wherein the first MAC random access response includes a first timing advance command (e.g., Timing Advance Command), and/or the second MAC random access response includes a second timing advance command, optionally, the first timing advance command is calculated by the first network device according to the first random access preamble, and/or the second timing advance command is calculated by the second network device according to the second random access preamble. Optionally, the first MAC random access response includes a first network device identifier, which is used to indicate that the first timing advance command is applied to uplink transmission to the first network device; and/or the second MAC random access response includes a second network device identifier, which is used to indicate that the second timing advance command is applied to uplink transmission to the second network device. Optionally, the network device identifier may be a random preamble sequence group index value or an SSB group index value.
第五步:由控制资源集池索引参数值为0的控制资源集中传输的物理下行控制信道调度的第一物理上行信道(例如:PUSCH/PUCCH)/参考信号(例如:SRS)使用第一定时提前命令进行定时调整;和/或,由控制资源集池索引参数值为1的控制资源集中传输的物理下行控制信道调度的第二物理上行信道/参考信号使用第二定时提前命令进行定时调整。Step 5: The first physical uplink channel (e.g., PUSCH/PUCCH)/reference signal (e.g., SRS) scheduled by the physical downlink control channel transmitted by the control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource pool is 0 is adjusted in timing using the first timing advance command; and/or, the second physical uplink channel/reference signal scheduled by the physical downlink control channel transmitted by the control resource set whose index parameter value of the control resource pool is 1 is adjusted in timing using the second timing advance command.
本实施例通过上述方案,进行基于竞争的随机接入过程,在基于多个下行控制信息的多个网络设备场景,可以分别向两个网络设备分别进行基于竞争的随机接入过程,提高定时调整的准确性。This embodiment uses the above solution to perform a contention-based random access process. In a scenario of multiple network devices based on multiple downlink control information, a contention-based random access process can be performed on two network devices respectively, thereby improving the accuracy of timing adjustment.
第十二实施例Twelfth Embodiment
在本申请上述实施例的基础上,本实施例进一步公开了前述实施例中的控制方法。Based on the above embodiments of the present application, this embodiment further discloses the control method in the above embodiments.
在本申请实施例中,网络设备(如:基站)发送下行信息,包括无线资源控制信令、系统信息、下行控制信息及同步广播块中的至少一项。In an embodiment of the present application, a network device (eg, a base station) sends downlink information, including at least one of radio resource control signaling, system information, downlink control information, and a synchronous broadcast block.
可选地,无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息包括突发中同步广播块位置参数、每个元素的同步广播块个数参数、元素的排列图样参数、在一个组参数、组状态参数、短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项。Optionally, the wireless resource control signaling and/or system information includes a synchronization broadcast block position parameter in a burst, a synchronization broadcast block number parameter for each element, an element arrangement pattern parameter, a group parameter, a group status parameter, a short bitmap parameter, a medium bitmap parameter, and at least one of a long bitmap parameter.
可选地,下行控制信息包括第一下行控制信息和/或第二下行控制信息。Optionally, the downlink control information includes first downlink control information and/or second downlink control information.
当终端设备接收到网络设备发送的下行信息后,根据下行信息选取或确定物理随机接入信道时机,在物理随机接入信道时机发送对应的随机接入前导,在随机接入响应窗口中接收对应所述随机接入前导的随机接入响应,根据随机接入响应中的定时提前命令对物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整。When the terminal device receives the downlink information sent by the network device, it selects or determines the physical random access channel opportunity according to the downlink information, sends the corresponding random access preamble at the physical random access channel opportunity, receives the random access response corresponding to the random access preamble in the random access response window, and adjusts the timing of the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal according to the timing advance command in the random access response.
可选地,终端设备在根据下行信息选取或确定物理随机接入信道时机过程中,基于下行信息中的无线资源控制信令 和/或系统信息选取或确定第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块;基于第一同步广播块和/或第一下行控制信息选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于第二同步广播块和/或第二下行控制信息选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机。Optionally, in the process of selecting or determining the physical random access channel timing according to the downlink information, the terminal device selects or determines the first group of synchronous broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronous broadcast blocks based on the wireless resource control signaling and/or system information in the downlink information; selects or determines the first physical random access channel timing based on the first synchronous broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or selects or determines the second physical random access channel timing based on the second synchronous broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information.
可选地,终端设备通过各参数确定如何进行SSB分组,包括终端设备根据突发中同步广播块位置参数选取或确定用于传输的同步广播块;和/或,在服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共配置信息元素中增加第二突发中同步广播块位置参数;和/或,在突发中同步广播块位置参数中增加第二组在一个组参数和组状态参数,和/或第二组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项。Optionally, the terminal device determines how to perform SSB grouping through various parameters, including the terminal device selecting or determining the synchronized broadcast block for transmission based on the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the burst; and/or, adding a second synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the burst to the service cell common system information block configuration information element and/or the service cell common configuration information element; and/or, adding a second group of in-group parameters and group status parameters, and/or at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters to the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the burst.
可选地,终端设备根据第一突发中同步广播块位置参数得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二突发中同步广播块位置参数得到第二组同步广播块;Optionally, the terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to a synchronized broadcast block position parameter in a first burst, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to a synchronized broadcast block position parameter in a second burst;
终端设备根据每个元素的同步广播块个数参数和/或元素的排列图样参数,对候选同步广播块和/或用于传输的同步广播块进行分组,得到第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块;The terminal device groups candidate synchronized broadcast blocks and/or synchronized broadcast blocks for transmission according to the synchronized broadcast block number parameter of each element and/or the arrangement pattern parameter of the element to obtain a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks;
终端设备根据第一组在一个组参数和/或组状态参数得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二组在一个组参数和/或组状态参数得到第二组同步广播块;The terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the first group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the second group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters;
终端设备根据第一组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项得到第二组同步广播块。The terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to at least one of the first group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters.
可选地,包括以下至少一项:Optionally, at least one of the following is included:
终端设备基于第一下行控制信息和/或第一组同步广播块选取或确定第一同步广播块;The terminal device selects or determines the first synchronous broadcast block based on the first downlink control information and/or the first group of synchronous broadcast blocks;
终端设备基于第二下行控制信息和/或第二组同步广播块选取或确定第二同步广播块。The terminal device selects or determines the second synchronization broadcast block based on the second downlink control information and/or the second group of synchronization broadcast blocks.
可选地,终端设备根据第一下行控制信息中第一同步广播块索引值和/或第一物理随机接入信道掩码索引值选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或,根据第二下行控制信息中第二同步广播块索引值和/或第二物理随机接入信道掩码索引值选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机;Optionally, the terminal device selects or determines the first physical random access channel timing according to the first synchronization broadcast block index value and/or the first physical random access channel mask index value in the first downlink control information, and/or selects or determines the second physical random access channel timing according to the second synchronization broadcast block index value and/or the second physical random access channel mask index value in the second downlink control information;
可选地,网络设备对同步广播块与物理随机接入信道时机的关联方法设计约束关系,终端设备基于约束关系及第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于约束关系及第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机;Optionally, the network device designs a constraint relationship for the association method between the synchronous broadcast block and the physical random access channel opportunity, and the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the first synchronous broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the second synchronous broadcast block;
如果根据第一同步广播块和第二同步广播块得到的第一物理随机接入信道时机与第二物理随机接入信道时机在时域上相同,且终端设备不支持同时向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导,则终端设备根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或从第二同步广播块对应的后续可用的物理随机接入信道时机中选择一个作为第二物理随机接入信道时机;If the first physical random access channel opportunity obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block and the second synchronization broadcast block is the same as the second physical random access channel opportunity in the time domain, and the terminal device does not support sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same time, the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or selects one from the subsequently available physical random access channel opportunities corresponding to the second synchronization broadcast block as the second physical random access channel opportunity;
如果根据第一同步广播块和第二同步广播块得到的第一物理随机接入信道时机与第二物理随机接入信道时机在时域上不相同,且终端设备不支持同时向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导,则终端设备根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或根据第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机;If the first physical random access channel opportunity obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block and the second synchronization broadcast block is different from the second physical random access channel opportunity in the time domain, and the terminal device does not support sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same time, the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity according to the second synchronization broadcast block;
如果根据第一同步广播块和第二同步广播块得到的第一物理随机接入信道时机与第二物理随机接入信道时机相同,且终端设备支持同时向两个网络设备分别发送随机接入前导,则终端设备将网络设备标识增加到随机接入无线网络临时标识计算公式,得到改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识,并根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或根据第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机,将改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识关联于第一物理随机接入信道时机和/或第二物理随机接入信道时机。If the first physical random access channel opportunity obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block and the second synchronization broadcast block is the same as the second physical random access channel opportunity, and the terminal device supports sending random access preambles to two network devices at the same time, the terminal device adds the network device identifier to the random access wireless network temporary identifier calculation formula to obtain an improved random access wireless network temporary identifier, and obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity according to the second synchronization broadcast block, and associates the improved random access wireless network temporary identifier with the first physical random access channel opportunity and/or the second physical random access channel opportunity.
可选地,在网络设备接收到终端设备发送的第一随机接入前导后,对应发送包含第一定时提前命令的随机接入响应,可选地,第一定时提前命令用于供终端设备对第一物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整;Optionally, after the network device receives the first random access preamble sent by the terminal device, it correspondingly sends a random access response including a first timing advance command, and optionally, the first timing advance command is used for the terminal device to perform timing adjustment on the first physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal;
可选地,在网络设备接收到终端设备发送的第二随机接入前导后,对应发送包含第二定时提前命令的随机接入响应,可选地,第二定时提前命令用于供终端设备对第二物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整。Optionally, after the network device receives the second random access preamble sent by the terminal device, it sends a random access response including a second timing advance command. Optionally, the second timing advance command is used for the terminal device to perform timing adjustment on the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal.
可选地,网络设备接收终端设备经过第一定时提前命令定时调整并发送的第一物理上行信道和/或参考信号;和/或,网络设备接收终端设备经过第二定时提前命令定时调整并发送的第二物理上行信道和/或参考信号,则定时调整过程完成。Optionally, the network device receives the first physical uplink channel and/or reference signal sent by the terminal device after the timing adjustment is performed by the first timing advance command; and/or the network device receives the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal sent by the terminal device after the timing adjustment is performed by the second timing advance command, and the timing adjustment process is completed.
本实施例通过上述方案,具体在基于多个下行控制信息的多个网络设备场景中,使终端设备的随机接入过程能够基于特定一个网络设备进行,使得针对任意一个网络设备的物理上行信道和/或参考信号的定时计算与调整更准确。Through the above-mentioned scheme, this embodiment enables the random access process of the terminal device to be performed based on a specific network device in a scenario of multiple network devices based on multiple downlink control information, so that the timing calculation and adjustment of the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal of any network device are more accurate.
请参见图16,图16为本申请实施例提供的控制装置的结构示意图一,该装置可搭载在上述方法实施例中的终端设备上,该设备具体可以是服务器。图16所示的控制装置可以用于执行上述实施例所描述的方法实施例中的部分或全部功能。如图16所示,该控制装置110包括:Please refer to Figure 16, which is a schematic diagram of the structure of the control device provided in the embodiment of the present application. The device can be mounted on the terminal device in the above method embodiment, and the device can specifically be a server. The control device shown in Figure 16 can be used to perform some or all of the functions in the method embodiment described in the above embodiment. As shown in Figure 16, the control device 110 includes:
控制模块111,用于基于下行信息调整上行定时。The control module 111 is configured to adjust the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
可选地,所述下行信息包括无线资源控制信令、系统信息、下行控制信息及同步广播块中的至少一项;和/或,无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息包括突发中同步广播块位置参数、每个元素的同步广播块个数参数、元素的排列图样参数、在一个组参数、组状态参数、短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项;和/或,下行控制信息包括第一下行 控制信息和/或第二下行控制信息。Optionally, the downlink information includes at least one of wireless resource control signaling, system information, downlink control information and synchronous broadcast block; and/or, the wireless resource control signaling and/or system information includes a synchronous broadcast block position parameter in a burst, a synchronous broadcast block number parameter for each element, an element arrangement pattern parameter, at least one of a group parameter, a group status parameter, a short bitmap parameter, a medium bitmap parameter and a long bitmap parameter; and/or, the downlink control information includes first downlink control information and/or second downlink control information.
可选地,所述控制模块,还用于:Optionally, the control module is further used to:
基于下行信息选取或确定物理随机接入信道时机;Selecting or determining a physical random access channel opportunity based on downlink information;
在物理随机接入信道时机发送随机接入前导;Sending a random access preamble at a physical random access channel opportunity;
接收随机接入响应,并根据定时提前命令对物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整。Receive a random access response, and adjust the timing of a physical uplink channel and/or a reference signal according to the timing advance command.
可选地,所述基于下行信息选取或确定物理随机接入信道时机的步骤包括:Optionally, the step of selecting or determining a physical random access channel opportunity based on downlink information includes:
基于无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息选取或确定第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块;Selecting or determining a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on radio resource control signaling and/or system information;
基于第一同步广播块和/或第一下行控制信息选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于第二同步广播块和/或第二下行控制信息选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机。A first physical random access channel opportunity is selected or determined based on the first synchronization broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or a second physical random access channel opportunity is selected or determined based on the second synchronization broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information.
可选地,所述基于无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息选取或确定第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块的步骤之前,还包括以下至少一项:Optionally, before the step of selecting or determining the first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on radio resource control signaling and/or system information, at least one of the following items is also included:
根据突发中同步广播块位置参数选取或确定用于传输的同步广播块;Selecting or determining a sync broadcast block for transmission according to a sync broadcast block position parameter in a burst;
在服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共配置信息元素中增加第二突发中同步广播块位置参数;Adding a synchronization broadcast block position parameter in the second burst to a serving cell common system information block configuration information element and/or a serving cell common configuration information element;
在突发中同步广播块位置参数中增加第二组在一个组参数和组状态参数,和/或第二组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项。A second group of in-group parameters and group status parameters, and/or at least one of a second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters are added to the synchronous broadcast block position parameters in the burst.
可选地,所述基于无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息选取或确定第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块的步骤,包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the step of selecting or determining the first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on radio resource control signaling and/or system information includes at least one of the following:
根据第一突发中同步广播块位置参数得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二突发中同步广播块位置参数得到第二组同步广播块;Obtaining a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to synchronized broadcast block position parameters in the first burst, and/or obtaining a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to synchronized broadcast block position parameters in the second burst;
根据每个元素的同步广播块个数参数和/或元素的排列图样参数,对候选同步广播块和/或用于传输的同步广播块进行分组,得到第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块;Grouping candidate synchronized broadcast blocks and/or synchronized broadcast blocks for transmission according to a synchronized broadcast block number parameter of each element and/or an arrangement pattern parameter of the element to obtain a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks;
根据第一组在一个组参数和/或组状态参数得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二组在一个组参数和/或组状态参数得到第二组同步广播块;Obtain a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the first group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters, and/or obtain a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the second group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters;
根据第一组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项得到第二组同步广播块。A first group of synchronized broadcast blocks is obtained according to at least one of the first group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters, and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks is obtained according to at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters.
可选地,所述基于第一同步广播块和/或第一下行控制信息选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于第二同步广播块和/或第二下行控制信息选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机的步骤,包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the step of selecting or determining a first physical random access channel opportunity based on the first synchronization broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or selecting or determining a second physical random access channel opportunity based on the second synchronization broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information, includes at least one of the following:
根据第一下行控制信息中第一同步广播块索引值和/或第一物理随机接入信道掩码索引值选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或,根据第二下行控制信息中第二同步广播块索引值和/或第二物理随机接入信道掩码索引值选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机;Select or determine a first physical random access channel opportunity according to a first synchronization broadcast block index value and/or a first physical random access channel mask index value in the first downlink control information, and/or select or determine a second physical random access channel opportunity according to a second synchronization broadcast block index value and/or a second physical random access channel mask index value in the second downlink control information;
对同步广播块与物理随机接入信道时机的关联方法设计约束关系,基于约束关系及第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于约束关系及第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机;Designing a constraint relationship for the association method between the synchronous broadcast block and the physical random access channel opportunity, obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the first synchronous broadcast block, and/or obtaining a second physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the second synchronous broadcast block;
若满足第一预设条件,根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或从第二同步广播块对应的后续可用的物理随机接入信道时机中选择一个作为第二物理随机接入信道时机;If the first preset condition is met, obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or selecting one from the subsequently available physical random access channel opportunities corresponding to the second synchronization broadcast block as a second physical random access channel opportunity;
若满足第二预设条件,根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或根据第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机;If the second preset condition is met, obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtaining a second physical random access channel opportunity according to the second synchronization broadcast block;
若满足第三预设条件,将网络设备标识增加到随机接入无线网络临时标识计算公式,得到改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识,并根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或根据第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机,将改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识关联于第一物理随机接入信道时机和/或第二物理随机接入信道时机。If the third preset condition is met, the network device identifier is added to the random access wireless network temporary identifier calculation formula to obtain an improved random access wireless network temporary identifier, and the first physical random access channel timing is obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or the second physical random access channel timing is obtained according to the second synchronization broadcast block, and the improved random access wireless network temporary identifier is associated with the first physical random access channel timing and/or the second physical random access channel timing.
可选地,所述控制模块,还用于以下至少一项:Optionally, the control module is further used for at least one of the following:
在第一物理随机接入信道时机发送第一随机接入前导;Sending a first random access preamble at a first physical random access channel opportunity;
在第二物理随机接入信道时机发送第二随机接入前导。The second random access preamble is sent at a second physical random access channel opportunity.
可选地,所述方法还包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the method further comprises at least one of the following:
在第一随机接入响应窗口中接收对应第一随机接入前导的随机接入响应,可选地,随机接入响应包括第一定时提前命令;receiving a random access response corresponding to a first random access preamble in a first random access response window, optionally wherein the random access response includes a first timing advance command;
在第二随机接入响应窗口中接收对应第二随机接入前导的随机接入响应,可选地,随机接入响应包括第二定时提前命令。A random access response corresponding to a second random access preamble is received in a second random access response window, and optionally, the random access response includes a second timing advance command.
可选地,所述根据定时提前命令对物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整的步骤包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the step of adjusting the timing of the physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal according to the timing advance command includes at least one of the following:
根据第一定时提前命令对第一物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整;Performing timing adjustment on the first physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal according to the first timing advance command;
根据第二定时提前命令对第二物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整。The timing of the second physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal is adjusted according to the second timing advance command.
本申请实施例提供的控制装置可以执行上述方法实施例所示的技术方案,其实现原理以及有益效果类似,此处不再 进行赘述。The control device provided in the embodiment of the present application can execute the technical solution shown in the above method embodiment, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
请参见图17,图17为本申请实施例提供的控制装置的结构示意图二,如图17所示,该控制装置120包括:Please refer to FIG. 17 , which is a second structural schematic diagram of a control device provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 17 , the control device 120 includes:
发送模块121,用于发送下行信息,以使终端设备基于下行信息调整上行定时。The sending module 121 is used to send downlink information so that the terminal device adjusts the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
可选地,所述下行信息包括无线资源控制信令、系统信息、下行控制信息及同步广播块中的至少一项;和/或,无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息包括突发中同步广播块位置参数、每个元素的同步广播块个数参数、元素的排列图样参数、在一个组参数、组状态参数、短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项;和/或,下行控制信息包括第一下行控制信息和/或第二下行控制信息。Optionally, the downlink information includes at least one of wireless resource control signaling, system information, downlink control information and synchronous broadcast block; and/or, the wireless resource control signaling and/or system information includes a synchronous broadcast block position parameter in a burst, a synchronous broadcast block number parameter for each element, an element arrangement pattern parameter, at least one of a group parameter, a group status parameter, a short bitmap parameter, a medium bitmap parameter and a long bitmap parameter; and/or, the downlink control information includes first downlink control information and/or second downlink control information.
可选地,所述发送模块,还用于以下至少一项:Optionally, the sending module is further used for at least one of the following:
终端设备基于下行信息选取或确定物理随机接入信道时机;The terminal device selects or determines the physical random access channel timing based on the downlink information;
终端设备在物理随机接入信道时机发送对应的随机接入前导;The terminal device sends the corresponding random access preamble at the physical random access channel opportunity;
终端设备在随机接入响应窗口中接收对应所述随机接入前导的随机接入响应;The terminal device receives a random access response corresponding to the random access preamble in a random access response window;
终端设备根据随机接入响应中的定时提前命令对物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整。The terminal device adjusts the timing of the physical uplink channel and/or reference signal according to the timing advance command in the random access response.
可选地,所述发送模块,还用于以下至少一项:Optionally, the sending module is further used for at least one of the following:
终端设备基于无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息选取或确定第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块;The terminal device selects or determines the first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on the radio resource control signaling and/or the system information;
终端设备基于第一同步广播块和/或第一下行控制信息选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于第二同步广播块和/或第二下行控制信息选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机。The terminal device selects or determines the first physical random access channel timing based on the first synchronization broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or selects or determines the second physical random access channel timing based on the second synchronization broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information.
可选地,所述发送模块,还用于以下至少一项:Optionally, the sending module is further used for at least one of the following:
终端设备根据突发中同步广播块位置参数选取或确定用于传输的同步广播块;The terminal device selects or determines the synchronous broadcast block for transmission according to the synchronous broadcast block position parameter in the burst;
终端设备在服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共配置信息元素中增加第二突发中同步广播块位置参数;The terminal device adds a synchronization broadcast block position parameter in the second burst in the serving cell common system information block configuration information element and/or the serving cell common configuration information element;
终端设备在突发中同步广播块位置参数中增加第二组在一个组参数和组状态参数,和/或第二组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项。The terminal device adds a second group of in-group parameters and group status parameters, and/or at least one of a second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters to the synchronous broadcast block position parameters in the burst.
可选地,所述发送模块,还用于以下至少一项:Optionally, the sending module is further used for at least one of the following:
终端设备根据第一突发中同步广播块位置参数得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二突发中同步广播块位置参数得到第二组同步广播块;The terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the first burst, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the synchronized broadcast block position parameter in the second burst;
终端设备根据每个元素的同步广播块个数参数和/或元素的排列图样参数,对候选同步广播块和/或用于传输的同步广播块进行分组,得到第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块;The terminal device groups candidate synchronized broadcast blocks and/or synchronized broadcast blocks for transmission according to the synchronized broadcast block number parameter of each element and/or the arrangement pattern parameter of the element to obtain a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks;
终端设备根据第一组在一个组参数和/或组状态参数得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二组在一个组参数和/或组状态参数得到第二组同步广播块;The terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the first group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the second group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters;
终端设备根据第一组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项得到第二组同步广播块。The terminal device obtains a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to at least one of the first group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters, and/or obtains a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters.
可选地,所述发送模块,还用于以下至少一项:Optionally, the sending module is further used for at least one of the following:
终端设备基于第一下行控制信息和/或第一组同步广播块选取或确定第一同步广播块;The terminal device selects or determines the first synchronous broadcast block based on the first downlink control information and/or the first group of synchronous broadcast blocks;
终端设备基于第二下行控制信息和/或第二组同步广播块选取或确定第二同步广播块。The terminal device selects or determines the second synchronization broadcast block based on the second downlink control information and/or the second group of synchronization broadcast blocks.
可选地,所述方法还包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the method further comprises at least one of the following:
终端设备根据第一下行控制信息中第一同步广播块索引值和/或第一物理随机接入信道掩码索引值选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或,根据第二下行控制信息中第二同步广播块索引值和/或第二物理随机接入信道掩码索引值选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机;The terminal device selects or determines the first physical random access channel timing according to the first synchronization broadcast block index value and/or the first physical random access channel mask index value in the first downlink control information, and/or selects or determines the second physical random access channel timing according to the second synchronization broadcast block index value and/or the second physical random access channel mask index value in the second downlink control information;
网络设备对同步广播块与物理随机接入信道时机的关联方法设计约束关系,终端设备基于约束关系及第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于约束关系及第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机;The network device designs a constraint relationship for the association method between the synchronous broadcast block and the physical random access channel opportunity, and the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the first synchronous broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the second synchronous broadcast block;
若满足第一预设条件,终端设备根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或从第二同步广播块对应的后续可用的物理随机接入信道时机中选择一个作为第二物理随机接入信道时机;If the first preset condition is met, the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or selects one from the subsequently available physical random access channel opportunities corresponding to the second synchronization broadcast block as the second physical random access channel opportunity;
若满足第二预设条件,终端设备根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或根据第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机;If the second preset condition is met, the terminal device obtains the first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel opportunity according to the second synchronization broadcast block;
若满足第三预设条件,终端设备将网络设备标识增加到随机接入无线网络临时标识计算公式,得到改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识,并根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或根据第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机,将改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识关联于第一物理随机接入信道时机和/或第二物理随机接入信道时机。If the third preset condition is met, the terminal device adds the network device identifier to the random access wireless network temporary identifier calculation formula to obtain an improved random access wireless network temporary identifier, and obtains the first physical random access channel timing according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtains the second physical random access channel timing according to the second synchronization broadcast block, and associates the improved random access wireless network temporary identifier with the first physical random access channel timing and/or the second physical random access channel timing.
可选地,所述发送模块,还用于以下至少一项:Optionally, the sending module is further used for at least one of the following:
终端设备根据随机接入响应中的第一定时提前命令对第一物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整;The terminal device performs timing adjustment on the first physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal according to the first timing advance command in the random access response;
终端设备根据随机接入响应中的第二定时提前命令对第二物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整。The terminal device adjusts the timing of the second physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal according to the second timing advance command in the random access response.
可选地,所述方法还包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the method further comprises at least one of the following:
在接收到第一随机接入前导后,发送包含第一定时提前命令的随机接入响应;After receiving the first random access preamble, sending a random access response including a first timing advance command;
在接收到第二随机接入前导后,发送包含第二定时提前命令的随机接入响应。After receiving the second random access preamble, a random access response including a second timing advance command is sent.
可选地,所述方法还包括以下至少一项:Optionally, the method further comprises at least one of the following:
接收终端设备经过第一定时提前命令定时调整并发送的第一物理上行信道和/或参考信号;A first physical uplink channel and/or a reference signal sent by a receiving terminal device after timing adjustment by a first timing advance command;
接收终端设备经过第二定时提前命令定时调整并发送的第二物理上行信道和/或参考信号。The receiving terminal device adjusts the timing of the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal and sends the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal after the second timing advance command.
本申请实施例提供的控制装置可以执行上述方法实施例所示的技术方案,其实现原理以及有益效果类似,此处不再进行赘述。The control device provided in the embodiment of the present application can execute the technical solution shown in the above method embodiment, and its implementation principle and beneficial effects are similar, which will not be repeated here.
参阅图18,图18为本申请实施例提供的通信设备的结构示意图。如图18所示,本实施例所述的通信设备140可以是前述方法实施例中提到的终端设备(或者可用于终端设备的部件)或者网络设备(或者可用于网络设备的部件)。通信设备140可用于实现上述方法实施例中描述的对应于终端设备或者网络设备的方法,具体参见上述方法实施例中的说明。Refer to Figure 18, which is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 18, the communication device 140 described in this embodiment can be a terminal device (or a component that can be used for a terminal device) or a network device (or a component that can be used for a network device) mentioned in the aforementioned method embodiment. The communication device 140 can be used to implement the method corresponding to the terminal device or the network device described in the aforementioned method embodiment, and specifically refer to the description in the aforementioned method embodiment.
通信设备140可以包括一个或多个处理器141,该处理器141也可以称为处理单元,可以实现一定的控制或者处理功能。处理器141可以是通用处理器或者专用处理器等。例如可以是基带处理器、或中央处理器。基带处理器可以用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器可以用于对通信设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。The communication device 140 may include one or more processors 141, which may also be referred to as a processing unit, and may implement certain control or processing functions. The processor 141 may be a general-purpose processor or a dedicated processor, etc. For example, it may be a baseband processor or a central processing unit. The baseband processor may be used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and the central processing unit may be used to control the communication device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
可选地,处理器141也可以存有指令143或者数据(例如中间数据)。可选地,指令143可以被处理器141运行,使得通信设备140执行上述方法实施例中描述的对应于终端设备或者网络设备的方法。Optionally, the processor 141 may also store instructions 143 or data (eg, intermediate data). Optionally, the instructions 143 may be executed by the processor 141, so that the communication device 140 executes the method corresponding to the terminal device or network device described in the above method embodiment.
可选地,通信设备140可以包括电路,该电路可以实现前述方法实施例中发送或接收或者通信的功能。Optionally, the communication device 140 may include a circuit, which can implement the functions of sending or receiving or communicating in the aforementioned method embodiments.
可选地,通信设备140中可以包括一个或多个存储器142,其上可以存有指令144,该指令可在处理器141上被运行,使得通信设备140执行上述方法实施例中描述的方法。Optionally, the communication device 140 may include one or more memories 142, on which instructions 144 may be stored. The instructions may be executed on the processor 141, so that the communication device 140 executes the method described in the above method embodiment.
可选地,存储器142中也可以是存储有数据。处理器141和存储器142可以单独设置,也可以集成在一起。Optionally, data may also be stored in the memory 142. The processor 141 and the memory 142 may be provided separately or integrated together.
可选地,通信设备140还可以包括收发器145和/或天线146。处理器141可以称为处理单元,对通信设备140(终端设备或核心网设备或者无线接入网设备)进行控制。收发器145可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等,用于实现通信设备140的收发功能。Optionally, the communication device 140 may further include a transceiver 145 and/or an antenna 146. The processor 141 may be referred to as a processing unit, and controls the communication device 140 (terminal device or core network device or wireless access network device). The transceiver 145 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and is used to implement the transceiver function of the communication device 140.
可选地,若该通信设备140用于实现对应于上述各实施例中终端设备的操作时,例如,可以由收发器145接收下行信息;以及,由处理器141基于下行信息调整上行定时。Optionally, if the communication device 140 is used to implement operations corresponding to the terminal device in the above embodiments, for example, the transceiver 145 can receive downlink information; and the processor 141 can adjust the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
可选地,处理器141和收发器145的具体实现过程可以参见上述各实施例的相关描述,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the specific implementation process of the processor 141 and the transceiver 145 can refer to the relevant description of the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,若该通信设备140用于实现对应于上述各实施例中网络设备的操作时,例如:可以由收发器145,发送发送下行信息,以使终端设备基于下行信息调整上行定时。Optionally, if the communication device 140 is used to implement operations corresponding to the network devices in the above embodiments, for example: the transceiver 145 can send downlink information so that the terminal device adjusts the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
可选地,处理器141和收发器145的具体实现过程可以参见上述各实施例的相关描述,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the specific implementation process of the processor 141 and the transceiver 145 can refer to the relevant description of the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
本申请中描述的处理器141和收发器145可实现在IC(Integrated Circuit,集成电路)、模拟集成电路、RFIC(Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit,射频集成电路)、混合信号集成电路、ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,专用集成电路)、PCB(Printed Circuit Board,印刷电路板)、电子设备等上。该处理器141和收发器145也可以用各种集成电路工艺技术来制造,例如CMOS(Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor,互补金属氧化物半导体)、NMOS(N Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor,N型金属氧化物半导体)、PMOS(Positive channel Metal Oxide Semiconductor,P型金属氧化物半导体)、BJT(Bipolar Junction Transistor,双极结型晶体管)、双极CMOS(BiCMOS)、硅锗(SiGe)、砷化镓(GaAs)等。The processor 141 and the transceiver 145 described in the present application can be implemented in an IC (Integrated Circuit), an analog integrated circuit, an RFIC (Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit), a mixed signal integrated circuit, an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), a PCB (Printed Circuit Board), an electronic device, etc. The processor 141 and the transceiver 145 can also be manufactured using various integrated circuit process technologies, such as CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor), NMOS (N Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor), PMOS (Positive channel Metal Oxide Semiconductor), BJT (Bipolar Junction Transistor), bipolar CMOS (BiCMOS), silicon germanium (SiGe), gallium arsenide (GaAs), etc.
本申请中,通信设备可以为终端设备(如手机),也可以为网络设备(如基站),具体需要根据上下文来加以确定,另外,终端设备可以以各种形式来实施。例如,本申请中描述的终端设备可以包括诸如手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、便捷式媒体播放器(Portable Media Player,PMP)、导航装置、可穿戴设备、智能手环、计步器等移动终端,以及诸如数字TV、台式计算机等固定终端设备。In this application, the communication device may be a terminal device (such as a mobile phone) or a network device (such as a base station), which needs to be determined according to the context. In addition, the terminal device may be implemented in various forms. For example, the terminal device described in this application may include mobile terminals such as mobile phones, tablet computers, laptop computers, PDAs, portable media players (PMPs), navigation devices, wearable devices, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc., as well as fixed terminal devices such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
虽然在以上的实施例描述中,通信设备以终端设备或者网络设备为例来描述,但本申请中描述的通信设备的范围并不限于上述终端设备或网络设备,而且通信设备的结构可以不受图21的限制。通信设备可以是独立的设备或者可以是较大设备的一部分。Although in the above embodiments, the communication device is described by taking a terminal device or a network device as an example, the scope of the communication device described in the present application is not limited to the above terminal device or network device, and the structure of the communication device may not be limited by Figure 21. The communication device may be an independent device or may be part of a larger device.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,包括:如上任一方法实施例中的终端设备;以及,如上任一方法实施例中的网络设备。An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, including: a terminal device as in any of the above method embodiments; and a network device as in any of the above method embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信设备,包括存储器、处理器,存储器上存储有控制程序,控制程序被处理器执行时实现上述任一实施例中的控制方法的步骤。本申请中的通信设备,可以是终端设备(如手机),也可以是网络设备(如基站),具体所指,需要根据上下文加以明确。The embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, including a memory and a processor, wherein a control program is stored in the memory, and when the control program is executed by the processor, the steps of the control method in any of the above embodiments are implemented. The communication device in the present application can be a terminal device (such as a mobile phone) or a network device (such as a base station), and the specific reference needs to be clarified according to the context.
本申请实施例还提供一种存储介质,存储介质上存储有控制程序,控制程序被处理器执行时实现上述任一实施例中 的控制方法的步骤。An embodiment of the present application also provides a storage medium, on which a control program is stored. When the control program is executed by a processor, the steps of the control method in any of the above embodiments are implemented.
在本申请实施例提供的通信设备和存储介质的实施例中,可以包含任一上述控制方法实施例的全部技术特征,说明书拓展和解释内容与上述方法的各实施例基本相同,在此不再做赘述。In the embodiments of the communication device and the storage medium provided in the embodiments of the present application, all the technical features of any of the above-mentioned control method embodiments may be included, and the expansion and explanation content of the specification are basically the same as those of the embodiments of the above-mentioned methods, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,当计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如上各种可能的实施方式中的方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program code. When the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the methods in the above various possible implementation modes.
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片,包括存储器和处理器,存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有芯片的设备执行如上各种可能的实施方式中的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, including a memory and a processor, wherein the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that a device equipped with the chip executes the methods in various possible implementation modes as described above.
可以理解,上述场景仅是作为示例,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的应用场景的限定,本申请的技术方案还可应用于其他场景。例如,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着系统架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。It is understood that the above scenarios are only examples and do not constitute a limitation on the application scenarios of the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application. The technical solutions of the present application can also be applied to other scenarios. For example, it is known to those skilled in the art that with the evolution of the system architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
上述本申请实施例序号仅仅为了描述,不代表实施例的优劣。The serial numbers of the embodiments of the present application are for description only and do not represent the advantages or disadvantages of the embodiments.
本申请实施例方法中的步骤可以根据实际需要进行顺序调整、合并和删减。The steps in the method of the embodiment of the present application can be adjusted in order, combined and deleted according to actual needs.
本申请实施例设备中的单元可以根据实际需要进行合并、划分和删减。The units in the device of the embodiment of the present application can be merged, divided and deleted according to actual needs.
在本申请中,对于相同或相似的术语概念、技术方案和/或应用场景描述,一般只在第一次出现时进行详细描述,后面再重复出现时,为了简洁,一般未再重复阐述,在理解本申请技术方案等内容时,对于在后未详细描述的相同或相似的术语概念、技术方案和/或应用场景描述等,可以参考其之前的相关详细描述。In the present application, the same or similar terminology concepts, technical solutions and/or application scenario descriptions are generally described in detail only the first time they appear. When they appear again later, they are generally not repeated for the sake of brevity. When understanding the technical solutions and other contents of the present application, for the same or similar terminology concepts, technical solutions and/or application scenario descriptions that are not described in detail later, reference can be made to the previous related detailed descriptions.
在本申请中,对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重,某个实施例中没有详述或记载的部分,可以参见其它实施例的相关描述。In the present application, the description of each embodiment has its own emphasis. For parts that are not described or recorded in detail in a certain embodiment, reference can be made to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments.
本申请技术方案的各技术特征可以进行任意的组合,为使描述简洁,未对上述实施例中的各个技术特征所有可能的组合都进行描述,然而,只要这些技术特征的组合不存在矛盾,都应当认为是本申请记载的范围。The various technical features of the technical solution of the present application can be arbitrarily combined. In order to make the description concise, not all possible combinations of the various technical features in the above embodiments are described. However, as long as there is no contradiction in the combination of these technical features, they should be considered to be within the scope of the present application.
通过以上的实施方式的描述,本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到上述实施例方法可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现,当然也可以通过硬件,但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在如上的一个存储介质(如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘)中,包括若干指令用以使得一台终端设备(可以是手机,计算机,服务器,被控终端设备,或者网络设备等)执行本申请每个实施例的方法。Through the description of the above implementation methods, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that the above-mentioned embodiment methods can be implemented by means of software plus a necessary general hardware platform, and of course by hardware, but in many cases the former is a better implementation method. Based on such an understanding, the technical solution of the present application, or the part that contributes to the prior art, can be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium (such as ROM/RAM, disk, CD) as above, including a number of instructions for a terminal device (which can be a mobile phone, a computer, a server, a controlled terminal device, or a network device, etc.) to execute the method of each embodiment of the present application.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络,或者其他可编程装置。计算机指令可以存储在存储介质中,或者从一个存储介质向另一个存储介质传输,例如,计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、存储盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD),或者半导体介质(例如固态存储盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. A computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When a computer program instruction is loaded and executed on a computer, a process or function according to an embodiment of the present application is generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. Computer instructions may be stored in a storage medium or transmitted from one storage medium to another storage medium. For example, computer instructions may be transmitted from one website, computer, server or data center to another website, computer, server or data center by wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The storage medium may be any available medium that a computer can access or a data storage device such as a server or data center that includes one or more available media integrated therein. Available media may be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disk, storage disk, tape), optical media (e.g., DVD), or semiconductor media (e.g., solid-state storage disk Solid State Disk (SSD)), etc.
以上仅为本申请的优选实施例,并非因此限制本申请的专利范围,凡是利用本申请说明书及附图内容所作的等效结构或等效流程变换,或直接或间接运用在其他相关的技术领域,均同理包括在本申请的专利保护范围内。The above are only preferred embodiments of the present application, and are not intended to limit the patent scope of the present application. Any equivalent structure or equivalent process transformation made using the contents of the present application specification and drawings, or directly or indirectly applied in other related technical fields, are also included in the patent protection scope of the present application.

Claims (13)

  1. 一种控制方法,其中,包括步骤:A control method, comprising the steps of:
    S1:基于下行信息调整上行定时。S1: Adjust uplink timing based on downlink information.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其中,步骤S1包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein step S1 comprises:
    基于下行信息选取或确定物理随机接入信道时机;Selecting or determining a physical random access channel opportunity based on downlink information;
    在物理随机接入信道时机发送随机接入前导;Sending a random access preamble at a physical random access channel opportunity;
    接收随机接入响应,并根据定时提前命令对物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整。Receive a random access response, and adjust the timing of a physical uplink channel and/or a reference signal according to the timing advance command.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述基于下行信息选取或确定物理随机接入信道时机的步骤包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein the step of selecting or determining the physical random access channel timing based on the downlink information comprises:
    基于无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息选取或确定第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块;Select or determine a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on radio resource control signaling and/or system information;
    基于第一同步广播块和/或第一下行控制信息选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于第二同步广播块和/或第二下行控制信息选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机。A first physical random access channel opportunity is selected or determined based on the first synchronization broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or a second physical random access channel opportunity is selected or determined based on the second synchronization broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information.
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述基于无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息选取或确定第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块的步骤之前,还包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 3, wherein before the step of selecting or determining the first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on radio resource control signaling and/or system information, at least one of the following is further included:
    根据突发中同步广播块位置参数选取或确定用于传输的同步广播块;Selecting or determining a sync broadcast block for transmission according to a sync broadcast block position parameter in a burst;
    在服务小区公共系统信息块配置信息元素和/或服务小区公共配置信息元素中增加第二突发中同步广播块位置参数;Adding a synchronization broadcast block position parameter in the second burst in a serving cell common system information block configuration information element and/or a serving cell common configuration information element;
    在突发中同步广播块位置参数中增加第二组在一个组参数和组状态参数,和/或第二组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项。A second group of in-group parameters and group status parameters, and/or at least one of a second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters are added to the synchronous broadcast block position parameters in the burst.
  5. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述基于无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息选取或确定第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块的步骤,包括以下至少一项:The method of claim 3, wherein the step of selecting or determining the first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or the second group of synchronized broadcast blocks based on radio resource control signaling and/or system information comprises at least one of the following:
    根据第一突发中同步广播块位置参数得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二突发中同步广播块位置参数得到第二组同步广播块;Obtaining a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to synchronized broadcast block position parameters in the first burst, and/or obtaining a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to synchronized broadcast block position parameters in the second burst;
    根据每个元素的同步广播块个数参数和/或元素的排列图样参数,对候选同步广播块和/或用于传输的同步广播块进行分组,得到第一组同步广播块和/或第二组同步广播块;Grouping candidate synchronized broadcast blocks and/or synchronized broadcast blocks for transmission according to a synchronized broadcast block number parameter of each element and/or an arrangement pattern parameter of the element to obtain a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks;
    根据第一组在一个组参数和/或组状态参数得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二组在一个组参数和/或组状态参数得到第二组同步广播块;Obtain a first group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the first group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters, and/or obtain a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks according to the second group of in-group parameters and/or group status parameters;
    根据第一组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项得到第一组同步广播块,和/或根据第二组短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项得到第二组同步广播块。A first group of synchronized broadcast blocks is obtained according to at least one of the first group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters, and/or a second group of synchronized broadcast blocks is obtained according to at least one of the second group of short bitmap parameters, medium bitmap parameters and long bitmap parameters.
  6. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述基于第一同步广播块和/或第一下行控制信息选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于第二同步广播块和/或第二下行控制信息选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机的步骤,包括以下至少一项:The method of claim 3, wherein the step of selecting or determining the first physical random access channel opportunity based on the first synchronization broadcast block and/or the first downlink control information, and/or selecting or determining the second physical random access channel opportunity based on the second synchronization broadcast block and/or the second downlink control information, comprises at least one of the following:
    根据第一下行控制信息中第一同步广播块索引值和/或第一物理随机接入信道掩码索引值选取或确定第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或,根据第二下行控制信息中第二同步广播块索引值和/或第二物理随机接入信道掩码索引值选取或确定第二物理随机接入信道时机;Select or determine a first physical random access channel opportunity according to a first synchronization broadcast block index value and/or a first physical random access channel mask index value in the first downlink control information, and/or select or determine a second physical random access channel opportunity according to a second synchronization broadcast block index value and/or a second physical random access channel mask index value in the second downlink control information;
    对同步广播块与物理随机接入信道时机的关联方法设计约束关系,基于约束关系及第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或基于约束关系及第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机;Designing a constraint relationship for the association method between the synchronous broadcast block and the physical random access channel opportunity, obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the first synchronous broadcast block, and/or obtaining a second physical random access channel opportunity based on the constraint relationship and the second synchronous broadcast block;
    若满足第一预设条件,根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或从第二同步广播块对应的后续可用的物理随机接入信道时机中选择一个作为第二物理随机接入信道时机;If the first preset condition is met, obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or selecting one from the subsequently available physical random access channel opportunities corresponding to the second synchronization broadcast block as a second physical random access channel opportunity;
    若满足第二预设条件,根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或根据第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机;If the second preset condition is met, obtaining a first physical random access channel opportunity according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or obtaining a second physical random access channel opportunity according to the second synchronization broadcast block;
    若满足第三预设条件,将网络设备标识增加到随机接入无线网络临时标识计算公式,得到改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识,并根据第一同步广播块得到第一物理随机接入信道时机,和/或根据第二同步广播块得到第二物理随机接入信道时机,将改进的随机接入无线网络临时标识关联于第一物理随机接入信道时机和/或第二物理随机接入信道时机。If the third preset condition is met, the network device identifier is added to the random access wireless network temporary identifier calculation formula to obtain an improved random access wireless network temporary identifier, and the first physical random access channel timing is obtained according to the first synchronization broadcast block, and/or the second physical random access channel timing is obtained according to the second synchronization broadcast block, and the improved random access wireless network temporary identifier is associated with the first physical random access channel timing and/or the second physical random access channel timing.
  7. 如权利要求2至6中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述根据定时提前命令对物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整的步骤包括以下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 2 to 6, wherein the step of adjusting the timing of the physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal according to the timing advance command comprises at least one of the following:
    根据第一定时提前命令对第一物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整;Performing timing adjustment on the first physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal according to the first timing advance command;
    根据第二定时提前命令对第二物理上行信道和/或参考信号进行定时调整。The timing of the second physical uplink channel and/or the reference signal is adjusted according to the second timing advance command.
  8. 一种控制方法,其中,包括步骤:A control method, comprising the steps of:
    S0:发送下行信息,以使终端设备基于下行信息调整上行定时。S0: Send downlink information so that the terminal device can adjust the uplink timing based on the downlink information.
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其中,所述下行信息包括无线资源控制信令、系统信息、下行控制信息及同步广播块中的至少一项;和/或,无线资源控制信令和/或系统信息包括突发中同步广播块位置参数、每个元素的同步广播块个数参数、元素的排列图样参数、在一个组参数、组状态参数、短位图参数、中位图参数及长位图参数中的至少一项;和/或,下行控制信息包括第一下行控制信息和/或第二下行控制信息。The method as claimed in claim 8, wherein the downlink information includes at least one of wireless resource control signaling, system information, downlink control information and synchronous broadcast blocks; and/or the wireless resource control signaling and/or the system information include at least one of a synchronous broadcast block position parameter in a burst, a synchronous broadcast block number parameter for each element, an element arrangement pattern parameter, a group parameter, a group status parameter, a short bitmap parameter, a medium bitmap parameter and a long bitmap parameter; and/or the downlink control information includes the first downlink control information and/or the second downlink control information.
  10. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其中,还包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 8, further comprising at least one of the following:
    在接收到第一随机接入前导后,发送包含第一定时提前命令的随机接入响应;After receiving the first random access preamble, sending a random access response including a first timing advance command;
    在接收到第二随机接入前导后,发送包含第二定时提前命令的随机接入响应。After receiving the second random access preamble, a random access response including a second timing advance command is sent.
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法,其中,还包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 10, further comprising at least one of the following:
    接收终端设备经过第一定时提前命令定时调整并发送的第一物理上行信道和/或参考信号;A first physical uplink channel and/or a reference signal sent by a receiving terminal device after timing adjustment by a first timing advance command;
    接收终端设备经过第二定时提前命令定时调整并发送的第二物理上行信道和/或参考信号。The receiving terminal device adjusts the timing of the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal and sends the second physical uplink channel and/or reference signal after the second timing advance command.
  12. 一种通信设备,其中,包括:存储器、处理器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的控制程序,所述控制程序被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求1或8所述的控制方法的步骤。A communication device, comprising: a memory, a processor, and a control program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, wherein the control program implements the steps of the control method as claimed in claim 1 or 8 when executed by the processor.
  13. 一种存储介质,其中,所述存储介质上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1或8所述的控制方法的步骤。A storage medium, wherein a computer program is stored on the storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the control method according to claim 1 or 8 are implemented.
PCT/CN2022/129006 2022-11-01 2022-11-01 Control method, communication device, and storage medium WO2024092513A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2022/129006 WO2024092513A1 (en) 2022-11-01 2022-11-01 Control method, communication device, and storage medium

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2022/129006 WO2024092513A1 (en) 2022-11-01 2022-11-01 Control method, communication device, and storage medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024092513A1 true WO2024092513A1 (en) 2024-05-10

Family

ID=90929042

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/129006 WO2024092513A1 (en) 2022-11-01 2022-11-01 Control method, communication device, and storage medium

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024092513A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108370290A (en) * 2017-09-20 2018-08-03 北京小米移动软件有限公司 The instruction of synchronization blocks and determining method, apparatus, base station, user equipment
WO2021128309A1 (en) * 2019-12-27 2021-07-01 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Random access method and terminal device
CN113766625A (en) * 2020-06-02 2021-12-07 北京佰才邦技术股份有限公司 Timing advance compensation indication and determination method, device, apparatus and medium
CN114390715A (en) * 2020-10-21 2022-04-22 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 User equipment and base station in wireless communication system and method performed by the same
CN114727339A (en) * 2021-01-05 2022-07-08 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Signal sending and receiving method, network equipment and terminal

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108370290A (en) * 2017-09-20 2018-08-03 北京小米移动软件有限公司 The instruction of synchronization blocks and determining method, apparatus, base station, user equipment
WO2021128309A1 (en) * 2019-12-27 2021-07-01 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Random access method and terminal device
CN113766625A (en) * 2020-06-02 2021-12-07 北京佰才邦技术股份有限公司 Timing advance compensation indication and determination method, device, apparatus and medium
CN114390715A (en) * 2020-10-21 2022-04-22 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 User equipment and base station in wireless communication system and method performed by the same
CN114727339A (en) * 2021-01-05 2022-07-08 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Signal sending and receiving method, network equipment and terminal

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ETRI: "Considerations on uplink timing advance and RACH procedure for NTN", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1907039 CONSIDERATIONS ON UPLINK TIMING ADVANCE AND RACH PROCEDURE FOR NTN - FINAL, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Reno, USA; 20190513 - 20190517, 3 May 2019 (2019-05-03), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051709072 *
LG ELECTRONICS: "Initial access and mobility for NR-U", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1910820, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. Chongqing, China; 20191014 - 20191020, 8 October 2019 (2019-10-08), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051789606 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021008430A1 (en) Transmission method and communication device
RU2765682C1 (en) Detection method, subscriber equipment and network device
JP7317949B2 (en) Transmission method and related equipment
US20220217810A1 (en) Data receiving method, data sending method, terminal, and network side device
WO2020192674A1 (en) Search space configuration method and apparatus, and communication device
US11963146B2 (en) Method and device for detecting slot format indication, and method and device for configuring slot format indication
WO2023024613A1 (en) Processing method, communication device, and storage medium
CN114641077B (en) Data transmission method, communication device, and storage medium
WO2023082688A1 (en) Paging cycle updating method, communication device, communication system, and storage medium
WO2021249476A1 (en) Srs resource indication method, srs resource determination method, and related device
US11297580B2 (en) Timing method for synchronization signal block, and related product
WO2023221831A1 (en) Processing method, communication device, and storage medium
WO2023130954A1 (en) Processing method, communication device and storage medium
WO2024092513A1 (en) Control method, communication device, and storage medium
WO2021155765A1 (en) Physical uplink control channel transmission method, apparatus, and device, and medium
EP4195804A1 (en) Processing method, communication device, communication system and storage medium
WO2023216036A1 (en) Processing method, communication device, and storage medium
WO2024082272A1 (en) Cell group handover method, communication device, and storage medium
WO2024036613A1 (en) Processing methods, communication device and storage medium
WO2023133693A1 (en) Communication method, communication device and storage medium
WO2023019524A1 (en) Indication method, communication device, communication system and storage medium
WO2024098417A1 (en) Resource processing method, communication device, and storage medium
WO2024082146A1 (en) Codebook determination method, and communication device and storage medium
WO2023225959A1 (en) Processing method, communication device, and storage medium
CN115955722B (en) Processing method, communication device and storage medium